Progecad Architecture English Manual
Progecad Architecture English Manual
ProgeCAD Architecture
Copyright 1991-2010 by 4M In this Users Guide the programs functions are described at the moment that the Users Guide was printed. Because this program is constantly being developed, possible modifications of the Users Guide could be found into the CD of the program in PDF file format.
INDEX 1. Introduction 1.1 Installing ProgeCAD Architecture 1.2 ProgeCAD Architecture Concept 1.3 Working with ProgeCAD Architecture 1.4 Users Guide Structure 1.5 Main menu 2. Drawing Principles 2.1 ProgeCAD Architecture General Drawing Commands 2.1.1 Working with ProgeCAD Architecture 2.1.2 Displaying commands on a shortcut menu 2.1.3 Displaying and hiding toolbars 2.1.4 Using the command bar 2.1.5 Using the status bar 2.1.6 Using prompt boxes 2.1.7 Selecting commands 2.1.8 Using commands 2.1.9 Starting commands using toolbars 2.1.10 Starting commands using menus 2.1.11 Starting commands using the command bar 2.1.12 Repeating a command 2.1.13 Nesting a command 2.1.14 Using the Prompt History window 2.1.15 Using scripts 2.1.16 Correcting mistakes 2.1.17 Customizing ProgeCAD Architecture 2.2 Working with drawings 2.2.1 Creating a new drawing 2.2.2 Opening a drawing 2.2.3 Opening damaged files 2.2.4 Setting up a drawing 2.2.5 Setting and changing the grid and snap alignment 2.2.6 Using the Draw Orthogonal option 2.2.7 Using entity snaps 2.2.8 Using fly-over snapping 2.2.9 Saving your drawing 2.3 Creating simple entities 2.3.1 Drawing lines 2.3.2 Drawing circles 2.3.3 Drawing arcs 2.3.4 Drawing ellipses 2.3.5 Drawing elliptical arcs 2.3.6 Creating point entities 2.3.7 Drawing rays 2.3.8 Drawing infinite lines 2.3.9 Creating freehand sketches 2.4 Creating complex entities 2.4.1 Drawing rectangles 2.4.2 Drawing polygons 2.4.3 Drawing polylines 2.4.4 Drawing donuts 2.4.5 Creating planes 2.4.6 Creating boundary polylines 1 1 4 5 7 9 11 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 16 17 18 18 18 20 20 30 34 34 41 42 45 45 46 47 50 50 51 53 53 54 57 57 58 59 63 64 65
2.4.7 Adding hatching 2.5 Modifying entities 2.5.1 Selecting entities 2.5.2 Modifying the properties of entities 2.5.3 Deleting entities 2.5.4 Copying entities 2.5.5 Rearranging entities 2.5.6 Resizing entities 2.5.7 Breaking and joining entities 2.5.8 Grouping entities 2.5.9 Editing polylines 2.5.10 Exploding entities 2.5.11 Chamfering and filleting entities 2.6 Working with coordinates 2.6.1 Using Cartesian coordinates 2.6.2 Using two-dimensional coordinates 2.6.3 Using three-dimensional coordinates 2.6.4 Using xyz point filters 2.6.5 Defining user coordinate systems 2.7 Viewing your drawing 2.7.1 Redrawing and regenerating a drawing 2.7.2 Moving around within a drawing 2.7.3 Changing the magnification of your drawing 2.7.4 Displaying multiple views 2.8 Working with blocks, attributes, and external references 2.8.1 Working with blocks 2.8.2 Working with attributes 2.8.3 Working with external references 2.8.4 Using raster images in a drawing 2.9 Drawing in three dimensions 2.9.1 Viewing entities in three dimensions 2.9.2 Creating three-dimensional entities 2.9.3 Creating three-dimensional faces 2.9.4 Editing in three dimensions 2.9.5 Editing three-dimensional solids 2.9.6 Modifying faces 2.9.7 Modifying edges 2.9.8 Imprinting solids 2.9.9 Separating solids 2.9.10 Shelling solids 2.9.11 Cleaning solids 2.9.12 Checking solids 2 9 13 Import Export ACIS File 2.10 Printing 3. AutoREG-Topographical 3.1 Text Parameters 3.2 Select Building Parameters 3.3 Grid 3.4 Specify Points 3.5 3D Building Plot 3.6 Building Plot Definition 3.7 Building Plot Measurement 3.8 Building Plot Sides 3.9 Building Plot Area
68 76 76 80 82 82 87 90 96 97 100 104 105 110 110 113 115 116 117 120 120 120 122 125 129 129 133 139 144 147 147 150 153 168 171 173 177 177 178 178 178 179 179 180 199 199 200 200 202 204 207 207 208 208
3.10 Adjacent Building Plots 3.11 Building Line 3.12 Symbol of North 3.13 Parallel Line 3.14 Street Name 3.15 Diagonal 3.16 Altitude 3.17 Building Outline 3.18 Modify Building 3.19 Character Size 3.20 Building Parameters Text 3.21 Coverage Diagram Text 3.22 Modify Text 4. AutoBLD: General 4.1 Building Definition 4.2 Layers Management 4.3 Copy Building Floor 4.4 Copy Entities 4.5 Typical Elements 4.6 Element Parameters 4.7 Project recognition commands (xref) 4.8 Building Exploration 5. AutoBLD: Basic Elements 5.1 Wall 5.1.1 Wall Drawing 5.1.2 Editing Wall Data 5.1.3 Joint Intersection Plane 5.2 Opening 5.3 Column 5.4 Slab 5.5 Beam 5.6 Floors Roofs 5.7 Library Drawings - Symbols 6. AutoBLD: Special Elements 6.1 Roof 6.1.1 Typical Roof Types 6.1.2 Special Roof types 6.1.3 Chimney 6.2 Staircases 6.2.1 General 6.2.2 Staircase Additional Elements 6.2.3 Staircases of Wood or Metal 6.2.4 Standard Staircases 6.2.5 Free-Route Staircase 6.3 Rails 6.4 Vertical Element - Gable 6.5 Ramp 7. AutoBLD: Other Options 7.1 Dimensioning 7.1.1 Horizontal Dimensioning 7.1.2 Vertical Dimensioning
208 208 209 209 209 210 210 210 210 211 211 212 212 213 214 215 216 216 216 217 232 232 233 233 233 237 242 243 276 277 280 281 283 287 287 287 299 300 301 301 305 308 309 314 318 322 323 325 325 325 326
7.1.3 Oblique Dimensioning 7.1.4 Automatic Dimensioning 7.1.5 Wall Dimensioning 7.1.6 Automatic Dimensioning Switch 7.1.7 Modify 7.2 Drawing Libraries 7.3 Project Drawings Monitoring Commands 7.3.1 Plan view 7.3.2 3D View 7.3.3 Project Drawings 8. Plus Drawing Tools 8.1 Text 8.1.1 Text Height 8.1.2 Select Style 8.1.3 Text 8.1.4 Edit Paragraph (Ptext) 8.1.5 Sequence (Arithmetic Progression) 8.1.6 Get Style (StyleSet) 8.1.7 Text Edit (DDEDIT) 8.1.8 Change Style (CSTYLE) 8.1.9 Capital-Lower case (TCASE) 8.1.10 Change Height (height) 8.1.11 Stretch (STRETCH) 8.1.12 Justify (TJUSTIFY) 8.1.13 Add (TAPPPEND) 8.1.14 Replace (TREPLACE) 8.1.15 Search-Replace (TSEARCH) 8.2 Text Frame 8.2.1 Orthogonal (Boxtxt) 8.2.2 Circular (Cirtxt) 8.2.3 Elliptical (Eliptxt) 8.2.4 Polygonal (Polgtxt) 8.3 Lines 8.3.1 Continuous 8.3.2 Dotten (Hidden) 8.3.3 Dashed 8.3.4 Dash-Dotted (Dashdot) 8.3.5 Dash-Double-Dotted (Divide) 8.3.6 Dash-Triple-Dotted (3Dot) 8.3.7 Dash-Spaced (Center) 8.3.8 Double 8.3.9 Change Width 8.3.10 Multiple Trim/Extend 8.3.11 Clear 8.4 Layers 8.4.1 Set Layer (Layset) 8.4.2 Freeze (Layr_Frz) 8.4.3 OFF (Layr_Off) 8.4.4 Lock (Layr_Lok) 8.4.5 Unlock (Layr_Unl) 8.4.6 LAYER Info (Layr_see) 8.4.7 Move to Current (CCL) 8.4.8 Change (ChgLayr) 8.4.9 Delete (DelLayer)
326 326 326 327 327 328 329 330 330 331 341 342 342 343 343 343 344 344 345 345 345 345 345 345 346 346 346 346 346 346 346 346 347 347 347 347 347 347 347 347 347 347 348 348 348 348 348 348 349 349 349 349 349 349
8.4.10 Current Only (Isolate) 8.4.11 Change Color 8.5 Blocks 8.5.1 Replace 8.5.2 Xplode 8.5.3 Count 8.5.4 View (Show) 9. Examples 9.1 Simple Example 9.1.1 Outer Wall Drawing 9.1.2 Inner Walls 9.1.3 Opening Drawing 9.1.4 Columns 9.1.5 Slab 9.1.6 Rails 9.1.7 Staircase 9.1.8 Copy Floor 9.1.9 Roof 9.1.10 Library Objects 10. PhotoIDEA 10.1 Hiding, shading and rendering 10.2 Creating hidden-lines images 10.3 Creating shaded images 10.4 Material Library 10.5 Edit Materials 10.6 Edit 3D Objects 10.7 Sun 10.8 Lights Placement 10.9 Edit Lights 10.10 Background 10.11 Fog 10.12 Landscape objects 10.13 Edit bitmap Objects 10.14 Bitmap Object Library 10.15 Render Settings 10.16 Render 10.17 Printing a rendered image 11. WalkIDEA 11.1 Project definition 11.2 Insert viewing point 11.3 Viewing point level 11.4 Insert path 11.5 Insert path from a polyline 11.6 Merge Paths 11.7 Insert staircase ascension 11.8 Geometry File 11.9 Walkthrough 11.9.1 File 11.9.2 Show 11.9.3 Properties 11.9.4 Help 11.9.5 Toolbar of the paths
349 349 350 350 350 350 350 351 351 352 356 358 361 362 363 364 365 366 368 369 371 371 372 372 373 377 378 378 378 379 381 381 382 382 383 384 385 387 387 388 388 388 388 388 388 388 389 389 389 390 393 393
11.9.6 Viewing points toolbar 11.9.7 Movement management toolbar 11.9.8 Display mode toolbar 11.9.9 Video toolbar 11.9.10 Images toolbar 11.9.11 Stereoanaglyph Toolbar
Preface
This Users Guide provides a detailed description of ProgeCAD Architecture overall concept, features, components and commands. The Quick Start Guide of ProgeCAD Architecture is a brief introduction to the basic ProgeCAD Architecture features and functionalities, and is particularly helpful for users experienced in CAD.
ProgeCAD Architecture is an advanced BIM (Building Information Modeling) vertical software application, which is built on top of IntelliCAD, the alternative CAD solution. The program is designed to meet in a very friendly and flexible way the entire needs of an architect, including advanced architectural design, rendering and virtual walkthrough. ProgeCAD Architecture adopts a modern BIM structure providing unique advantages to its user, regarding intelligent model shaping directly applied on the real 3D building model. Due to the IntelliCAD concept, ProgeCAD Architecture keeps all the usual CAD features and functions which have been introduced by AutoCAD plus the DWG compatibility as well. Moreover, ProgeCAD Architecture handles smart entities and intelligent building objects within its familiar BIM environment. More specifically, the program functionality applied on the intelligent objects results in the native application of all the Standard Icad/Acad commands (copy, move, trim, break, mirror, extend, copy-paste etc) directly to any building object (walls, openings, slabs, beams, columns etc), as well as in the native use of the Editing Tools (grips, "right click -> properties" etc) to every building object. Regarding the BIM-structured composite intelligent Objects, the design process is enhanced by a number of parametric dialogs embedding sophisticated algorithms to edit and shape any architectural objects (stairs, roofs, rails etc). As for the overall building model, due to its innovative BIM structure, ProgeCAD Architecture is capable to generate and continuously update the project drawings (sections, views, perspectives, etc) while also keeping any interventions made by the user (insertion of library items, text, annotation, etc). As a conclusion, through ProgeCAD Architecture any design ideas can be realized and presented easily, quickly and in a completed way. This user guide provides an in-depth walkthrough of the different aspects of ProgeCAD Architecture, by also giving detailed advice on how to use and get maximum benefit from the program.
1. Introduction
1.1 Installing ProgeCAD Architecture
1. Insert the CD in your computer CD-ROM drive (e.g. D:, E:). If you received your software via Internet, run the downloaded installation program. 2. When the installation popup menu appears, choose the language for the installation and click OK. 3. When the Welcome page appears (as shown below), click Next.
4. When the License Agreement dialog box appears, read it carefully. If you agree with the terms check the respective radio button and then click Next (you must agree with the terms to proceed with the installation).
progeCAD Architecture
5. In the next screen type your username and organization information and check if you want to create a desktop icon. Then click Next to see if the information is correct (see the following window) and finally click Install, so that the installation procedure begins.
6. As soon as the installation procedure is completed, the following last window appears on the screen and you have to click Finish. In case that the Run ProgeCAD Architecture check box is selected, the application will be executed.
4M
7. After the installation, the program appears in the program list (ProgeCAD Architecture). Attention! To make sure that the program can actually "see" the "key" (hasp), run the I1hasp.bat (or I2hasp.bat) program from the ProgeCAD Architecture directory (by clicking twice). After the HASP program is loaded a relevant message will appear. It is strongly recommended to deactivate any anti-virus programs running in your PC. In case the program is still not running, please check if the key is plugged into the port of your PC.
progeCAD Architecture
4M
ProgeCAD Architecture intelligent objects are handled through a user-friendly interface, constituting a very familiar and strong modeling environment. In particular, as shown in the figure, the Icad/Acad functionality applied on the Intelligent Objects results in the: Native application of all the Standard Icad/Acad commands (copy, move, trim, break, mirror, extend, copy-paste etc) directly to any building object (walls, openings, slabs, beams, columns etc). Native use of the Editing Tools (grips, "right click -> properties" etc) to every building object.
Regarding the BIM-structured composite intelligent Objects, ProgeCAD Architecture includes: Parametric dialogs with intelligent algorithms to edit and shape the building objects. Intelligent infrastructure plus the necessary editing commands regarding object materials & textures.
As a result, ProgeCAD Architecture produces a complete output, consisting of: - The full set of the project drawings (view plan drawings, views, cross sections, axonometric views, perspectives etc). What is also important here, is that due to its smart BIM structure, ProgeCAD Architecture is continuously updating the project drawings (sections, views, perspectives, etc) while also keeping any interventions made by the user (insertion of library items, text, annotation, etc). The set of the project drawings is properly viewed and managed by a tree-view browser, a smart explorer of the project drawings in fact. - High quality photorealistic scenes, which are also generated directly through the building model (PhotoIDEA component) - 3D/4D virtual reality videos, that can be easily created by the user (WalkIDEA component) to present fast and smooth 3D walkthrough and 4D stereoscopic view. Additionally, all the operations mentioned above are supported by the latest IntelliCAD engine, significantly empowered regarding ProgeCAD Architecture objects, in order to ensure high speed performance, even for large scale drawings.
progeCAD Architecture
drawing algorithms, ensuring the correct element shaping in every case (i.e. a freeway staircase, a complicated roof with lofts etc). As for the overall building model itself, due to its innovative BIM structure, ProgeCAD Architecture is capable to generate and continuously update the entire set of the project drawings (sections, views, perspectives, etc), at the same time keeping as well any interventions made by the user (insertion of library items, text, annotation, etc). In conclusion, the user can shape the building model with practically no limitations, working either on the view plan, any 3D view or even on front views, cross-sections and perspectives, watching at the same time the effects of those interventions. In addition, thanks to its BIM structure, ProgeCAD Architecture handles efficiently several other important aspects of the design & construction processes, such as for instance the bill of materials (BoM), the smart topographical functions, even the seamless integration between ProgeCAD Architecture and each one of the other 4M Suite software solutions (STRAD for Structural Design, FINE for the Building Services HVAC, Electrical, Sanitary etc), all of them using and referring to the same, standard Building Information Model (4M-BLD file format). Further to the project drawings, ProgeCAD Architecture takes advantage of its BIM structure to generate high quality photorealistic scenes, as well as impressive animation videos, through the two powerful components PhotoIDEA and WalkIDEA respectively. More specifically: PhotoIDEA supports the creation of high quality photorealistic images using a state-of-the-art ray tracing technology. With PhotoIDEA, the real representation of any scene of the 3D model becomes an extremely simple procedure. PhotoIDEA uses a rich library of real materials with texture (e.g. marble, wood, stone, carpets etc), which can be selected and adjusted properly if necessary. The fact that the attributes of the ProgeCAD Architecture building objects include material information simplifies the editing process. Given that each part of any object (e.g. walls, frames, roofs, stair elements etc) is assigned by default to a certain material, the result of the photorealistic representation can appear on screen from the first steps of the design. The selection and editing of the materials the user wishes to use in the project, the positioning of the lighting sources, the selection of background and photographic objects and, finally, the running of the "Photorealism" command with various quality options are all performed in a friendly and fast way through the "PhotoIDEA" group of commands. WalkIDEA is the virtual Walkthrough module of ProgeCAD Architecture, which enables the user to take a "walk" inside or outside the building model, in order to face the reality. WalkIDEA makes alive the scenes of PhotoIDEA in a very simple manner: Either by using the mouse or a joystick or by defining a viewing path. Any virtual "trip" can be stored as an avi file. More than a simple walk, the "WalkIDEA" group of commands also includes some supplementary effects, such as the ascension of a staircase, the option to open a door while "walking" etc. In addition, WalkIDEA can offer the experience of a 4D stereoscopic reality through a pair of stereo glasses.
4M
progeCAD Architecture
4M
The main menu options include the following groups: 1. The project files management options (New Project, Open Project and Project Information) which are located within the FILE group of commands. 2. The AutoREG group of commands, including the instructions required for the creation and editing of the Topographical diagram. 3. The AutoBLD menu, which includes all the drawing-editing and viewing commands of the Architectural Design process. 4. The PhotoIDEA menu option, with the commands supporting the photorealism. 5. The WalkIDEA group of commands, supporting the virtual reality walkthrough. 6. The bonus menu named PLUS, which includes a series of drawing utilities for the ProgeCAD Architecture user.
progeCAD Architecture
To start drawing with ProgeCAD Architecture, a new project should be first defined with the New Project command, which is included in the FILE menu. With this command, a window will appear on the screen where you must type the name of the Project. Then, click OK and you will be ready to start drawing and work on the project. In order to "open" an existing project, e.g. a project created through ProgeCAD Architecture (i.e. for further editing or just for viewing), just select "Open Project", and a list with the existing projects in your disk will be displayed on the screen. The functionality of this window list follows the windows standards.
It is pointed out that the ProgeCAD Architecture projects are saved into directories with the extension BLD, following the general 4M "Building" standardisation. If an existing project is selected, it is loaded and displayed on the screen. In any case, you can start working with ProgeCAD Architecture, using its commands grouped as described above. A detailed description of those commands is provided within the Chapters 3-11 of this User Guide. Before that, a brief reference to the basic drawing principles is given within next Chapter 2, a Chapter that could be skipped by the user who is familiar with CAD programs.
10
4M
2. Drawing Principles
2.1 ProgeCAD Architecture General Drawing Commands
The aim of this section is to describe the operation of the general drawing commands. The commands which belong to the specific architectural commands of ProgeCAD Architecture, such as the group of commands AutoREG or AutoBLD, are described in detail within the next chapters. The objective of the following paragraphs is rather the familiarization of the user with the basic principles of the CAD programs. The users who know how to work with CAD programs can ignore this section.
progeCAD Architecture
11
A. You can customize the menu bar at the top of the window. B. You can customize the toolbars, changing the appearance and arrangement of tools and adding your own commands and macros. C. Your drawings are displayed in the drawing window. D. Click a tab to switch between the drawing of your model and a printed layout. E. You can type commands in the command bar. To reposition the command bar, drag it to another location on your screen. F. The status bar displays information such as the name or purpose of a tool, the current cursor coordinates, layer name, and mode settings. G. The user coordinate system (UCS) icon indicates the orientation of the drawing in threedimensional space. H. You can move and dock the toolbars to any location on your screen. J. Properties Panel. Displays all entity data. I. Building Explorer. Displays information for the building.
12
4M
To choose which toolbars to display 1. Do one of the following: Choose View > Toolbars. Right-click anywhere on a docked toolbar to display the toolbar shortcut menu, and then choose Toolbars. You can also select the toolbars you want displayed directly on the shortcut menu.
2. In the Select Toolbars dialog box, choose the toolbars you want displayed, and then click OK.
Select the check boxes for the toolbars you want to display.
progeCAD Architecture
13
B. Cursor coordinates (x,y,z) C. Layer name. Double-click to change layers. D. Drawing color. Double-click to change colors. E. Linetype. By default, the linetype is BYLAYER. snaps. F. Lineweight. By default, the lineweight is BYLAYER. Double-click to change lineweights. G. Text style. Double-click to change text styles. H. Dimension style. Double-click to change dimension styles. I. Snap setting. Double-click to toggle on or off. J. Grid setting. Double-click to toggle on or off. K. Orthogonal setting. Double-click to toggle on or off. L. Entity snap setting. Double-click to select entity. Double-click to change linetypes. M. Lineweight display. Double-click to toggle on or off. N. Model space or paper space. Double-click to toggle between model space and paper space. O. Digitizer mode. Double-click to toggle on or off.
To change the items that display on the status bar 1. Right-click an empty area of the status bar. 2. Select an item to add or remove it. To change the setting of an item on the status bar 1. Do one of the following: Double-click the status bar item. Right-click the status bar item you want to change, and then select the desired setting.
14
4M
The prompt box is displayed by default. To turn off the display of prompt boxes, choose Tools > Options, click the Display tab, and then click the Display Prompt Boxes check box to clear it.
Some commands remain active until you end them, so you can repeat an action without having to select a command repeatedly. You can end a command by clicking Done in the prompt box or by pressing Esc.
TIP: If you are using the command bar to type commands, you can type multiple before starting some commands (Circle, Arc, and Rectangle, for example) to repeat a command indefinitely. When you are done with a command, press Esc.
progeCAD Architecture
15
2. In the Command Lines To Track field, type the number of command lines you want to display, and then click OK.
A Click the Undo tool to reverse the last action. B Click the Redo tool to reverse the previous undos.
You can undo multiple actions by typing undo and specifying the number of actions to undo.
16
4M
Tip: You can easy modify menus and toolbars by selecting Tools>Menu Select. In this window you can change the language and the type of appearance:
Please note that each mouse button performs a specific function. The functions of the mouse buttons are the following: Left button: Right button: Middle button: Selection of a command, point or object. Enter "Esnap" command.
Note: In case your mouse has only two buttons (or it has three buttons, but the
mouse driver has not been properly installed for the middle button to function), the first two functions are executed as described while the third one can be substituted by the combination of the "Shift" key and the right mouse button (right click while <Shift> is pressed down)
progeCAD Architecture
17
2. Click Use A Template Drawing, and then click Next. 3. To display the Open Template dialog box, click Browse. 4. Select the template (.dwt) file that you want, and then click Open. You can also choose any drawing (.dwg) file to use as a template. 5. Click Finish.
18
4M
To open an existing drawing 1. Use one of the following methods: Choose File > Open. On the Standard toolbar, click the Open tool ( Type open and then press Enter. ).
2. In Files of Type, choose the type of file you want to open. 3. Choose the folder containing the desired file. 4. Choose the drawing you want to open. 5. Click Open. If the drawing requires a password, enter the password, click OK to verify the password, and then click Open again. TIP: To quickly open a drawing file from the Open Drawing dialog box, double-click the drawing name.
A. Displays a description of the file size, creation date, and other information about the drawing. B. Opens the drawing as read-only to prevent making changes to the file. C. Turns the drawing preview on or off. D. Unavailable when opening drawings; available only when saving drawings. E. Displays an image of the drawing before you open it.
TIP: To quickly open a drawing file that you recently used, choose File > <file name>. The program tracks the last four drawings
progeCAD Architecture
19
You can also check any open file for errors. To open a damaged file 1. Use one of the following methods: Choose File > Recover. Type recover and then press Enter.
2. In Files of Type, choose the type of file you want to recover. 3. Choose the directory containing the damaged file. 4. Choose the damaged file you want to recover. 5. Click Open. To check a drawing file for errors 1. With the drawing open that you want to check, do one of the following: Choose File > Audit. Type audit and then press Enter.
2. Choose whether you want ProgeCAD Architecture to fix any found errors automatically, and then press Enter. NOTE If the AUDITCTL system variable is set to On and errors are found during a file recovery or audit, an ASCII file is created that describes the audit. The ASCII file is saved in the same folder as the audited drawing, and has the same name as the drawing file, but with an .adt file extension.
20
4M
Choose Settings > Explore Layers. On the Settings toolbar, click the Explore Layers tool ( Type explayers and then press Enter. Type la and then press Enter. )
2. Double-click the layer name that you want to make current. 3. Close the ProgeCAD Architecture Explorer window.
TIP: On the status bar, right-click on the current layer control, and from the list, select the layer you want to make current. Setting the current entity color An entitys color determines how it is displayed and, if you are using a color printer, how it prints. Entities are created in the current color. There are 255 standard colors and two additional color properties that are often referred to as colors. You can use seven of the 255 standard colors by name: red, yellow, green, cyan, blue, magenta, and white. (Numbers eight and nine are not named.) Each color has a unique number from 1 to 255. The two additional color properties are BYLAYER and BYBLOCK. These color properties cause an entity to adopt the color either of the layer or of the block in which it is a member. BYLAYER is color number 256, and BYBLOCK is color number 0. In all commands for which you would use a color, you can indicate BYLAYER and BYBLOCK as well as by numbers 256 and 0, respectively. You can choose colors by selecting them from the Color dialog box. In the command bar or in some dialog boxes, you specify a color either by name or by number. When you open a new drawing, entities are created in the color BYLAYER, which adopts the color of the current layer. Initially, layer 0 is both the only layer and the current layer. Its default color is white, so your entities appear as white. To set the current entity color 1. Do one of the following: Choose Settings > Drawing Settings. On the Settings toolbar, click the Drawing Settings tool ( Type settings and then press Enter. )
progeCAD Architecture
21
2. Click the Entity Creation tab. 3. Click Select Color. 4. In the Color dialog box, click BYBLOCK, BYLAYER, or the color of your choice, or type the color number in the Index box. 5. Click OK. 6. Click OK again. TIP: On the status bar, right-click on the current color, and select from the list the color you want to use for new entities. You can also click Select Color to choose additional colors.
A. Click to set the color to one of the standard colors. B. Click to set the color to one of the gray shades. C. Click to set the color to any of the available colors. D. Indicates the current color. E. Displays the color number. F. Click to set the current color BYLAYER. G. Click to set the current color BYBLOCK.
Setting the current linetype Linetypes help convey information. You use different linetypes to differentiate the purpose of one line from another. A linetype consists of a repeating pattern of dots, dashes, or blank spaces. Linetypes determine the appearance of entities both on the screen and when printed. By default, every drawing has at least three linetypes: CONTINUOUS, BYLAYER, and BYBLOCK. Your drawing may also contain an unlimited number of additional linetypes. When you create an entity, it is created using the current linetype. By default, the current linetype is BYLAYER. progeCAD indicates that the entity linetype is determined by the current layers linetype by assigning the BYLAYER property as the default linetype setting. When you assign BYLAYER, changing a layers linetype changes the linetype of all the entities assigned that layer (if they were created using the linetype BYLAYER).
22
4M
You can also select a specific linetype as the current linetype, which overrides the layers linetype setting. Entities are then created using that linetype, and changing the layer linetype has no effect on them. As a third option, you can use the linetype BYBLOCK property, in which case new entities are drawn using the CONTINUOUS linetype until you group them into a block. The entities then inherit the blocks linetype setting when you insert the block into a drawing. To set the current linetype 1. Do one of the following: Choose Settings > Drawing Settings. On the Settings toolbar, click the Drawing Settings tool ( Type settings and then press Enter. )
2. Click the Entity Creation tab. 3. In the Entity Linetype list, choose the linetype that you want to make current. 4. Click OK. TIP: On the status bar, right-click the word BYLAYER for the current linetype, click Properties, and then choose the linetype that you want to make current. Setting the linetype scale You can specify the linetype scale. The smaller the scale, the more repetitions of the linetype pattern are generated per drawing unit. For example, a linetype pattern is defined as a sequence of dashed lines and open spaces, each 0.25 units long. The line-type scale uses the drawing scale factor to determine the length. A scale factor of 0.5 would reduce the length of each line and space to 0.125 units; a scale factor of 2 would increase the length of each to 0.5 units. NOTE: Setting the linetype scale too large or too small may result in a line pattern looking like a solid line, depending on what the scale view is or at what scale the drawing is plotted. You can control a new entitys individual linetype scale factor as well as the overall or global scale factor applied to all the entities in the drawing. To set the current individual linetype scale 1. Do one of the following: Choose Settings > Drawing Settings. On the Settings toolbar, click the Drawing Settings tool ( Type settings and then press Enter. ).
2. Click the Entity Creation tab. 3. In the Linetype Scale field, type or choose the linetype scale that you want to make current. 4. Click OK. To change the global linetype scale 1. Do one of the following: Choose Settings > Drawing Settings. 23
progeCAD Architecture
On the Settings toolbar, click the Drawing Settings tool ( Type settings and then press Enter.
).
2. Click the Entity Creation tab. 3. In the Global Linetype Scale field, type or choose the global linetype scale that you want to change. 4. Click OK. Setting the current lineweight Lineweights help differentiate the purpose of one line from another. Lineweights determine how thick or thin entities appear both on the screen and when printed. Every drawing has these lineweights: DEFAULT, BYLAYER, BYBLOCK, and many additional lineweights in millimeters (or you can use inches). When you create an entity, it is created using the current lineweight. By default, the current lineweight for a new entity is BYLAYER. This means that the entity line-weight is determined by the current layer. When you assign BYLAYER, changing a layers lineweight changes the lineweight of all the entities assigned that layer (if they were created using the lineweight BYLAYER). You can also select a specific lineweight (or DEFAULT) as the current lineweight, which overrides the layers lineweight setting. Entities are then created using that lineweight (or the DEFAULT lineweight), and changing the layer lineweight has no effect on them. As a third option, you can use the lineweight BYBLOCK property, in which case new entities are drawn using the DEFAULT lineweight until you group them into a block. The entities then inherit the blocks lineweight setting when you insert the block into a drawing. If you choose a lineweight that is less than .025 millimeter, it displays as one pixel when you create your drawing. When you print your drawing, it prints at the thinnest lineweight that is available for your printer. You cannot assign lineweights to planes, points, TrueType fonts, and raster images (if supported in your version of progeCAD). To set the current lineweight 1. Do one of the following: Choose Settings > Drawing Settings. On the Settings toolbar, click the Drawing Settings tool ( Type settings and then press Enter. ).
2. Click the Entity Creation tab. 3. In the Lineweight list, choose the lineweight that you want to make current. 4. Click OK. TIP: On the status bar, right-click the word BYLAYER for the current linetype, and then choose the current lineweight. You can also double-click the word LWT to toggle the display of lineweights on and off.
24
4M
NOTE: To see lineweights in your drawing, you may need to turn on lineweights. For details, see Controlling the display of lineweights.
2. Click the Drawing Units tab. 3. Under Change Settings For, choose Linear Units. 4. Under Unit Types, select a unit type. 5. Under Display Precision, type the display precision according to the number of decimal places you want, or click the arrows to select it. The field above this setting shows an example of the linear unit type at the current precision. 6. Click OK.
A. Select the type of linear units. B. Choose the display precision for linear units.
progeCAD Architecture
25
To set the angular drawing units 1. Do one of the following: 2. Choose Settings > Drawing Settings. On the Settings toolbar, click the Drawing Settings tool ( Type settings and then press Enter. ).
3. Under Change Settings For, choose Angular Units. 4. Under Unit Types, select a unit type. 5. Under Display Precision, type the display precision according to the number of decimal places you want, or click the arrows to select it. The field above this setting shows an example of the angular unit type at the current precision. 6. Under Angle Direction, select the direction in which angles increase when you specify a positive angle value. 7. Under Angle Base, specify the compass location for the zero angle. For example, by default, angle 0 is at the three oclock or east position. The adjacent icon shows the current location of the angle base. 8. Click OK.
A. Determines the type of units you are controlling. B. Select the type of angular units. C. Choose the display precision for angular units. D. Select the direction in which angles increase. E. Select the angle base, the direction of the zero angle.
26
4M
Scale factor
192 96 64 48 32 24 16 12 8 4 120 240 360 480 600 720 1200
Text height
24 12 8 6 4 3 2 1.5 1 0.5 15 30 45 60 75 90 150
You can use these scale factors to predetermine the size of your drawing to make sure that it fits on a specific size paper when you print it. You control the size of your drawing by the drawing limits. To calculate the drawing limits to match the size of your paper, multiply the dimensions of your paper size by your scale factor.
progeCAD Architecture
27
For example, if the paper you use to print measures 36 inches x 24 inches and you plot your drawing at 1/8 = 1-0 (in other words, using a scale factor of 96), the size of your drawing measured in drawing units is 36 x 96 (or 3,456 units) wide and 24 x 96 (or 2,304 units) high. Keep in mind that you can print the finished drawing at any scale, regardless of the scale factor you calculate. You can also print on paper of a different size and use the Layout tabs to create different views of your drawing and to position and scale those views differently. The scaling factor is not related to the size of the entities you draw; it simply provides a preliminary guide to help you establish the text height and drawing limits when you begin your drawing. You can change the text height and drawing limits at any time.
2. Click the Entity Creation tab. 3. Under Change Settings For, choose Text. 4. In the Default Text Height field, select the text height or type the text height value that you want. 5. Click OK.
28
4M
NOTE: The default text height applies only if the current text style height is 0.0. Otherwise, the text height for the current style takes precedence.
2. Click either the Coordinate Input tab or the Display tab. 3. Under Change Settings For, choose Limits. 4. Specify the x-coordinate and y-coordinate of the upper right drawing limit and the lower left drawing limit. You can also click Select to specify the drawing limits by selecting points in the drawing. 5. To constrain your drawing to these drawing limits, click the Disallow Input Beyond Limits check box. 6. Click OK.
A Choose limits. B. Specify the x-coordinate and y-coordinate of the upper right drawing limit. C. Specify the x-coordinate and y-coordinate of the lower left drawing limit.
progeCAD Architecture
29
D. When you click this check box, the program prevents you from drawing outside the drawing limits. E. Specify the drawing limits by selecting points in the drawing.
2. Click the Coordinate Input tab. 3. Under Change Settings For, choose Snap And Grid. 4. Under Reference Grid, click the Show Grid check box. 5. Under Reference Grid Spacing, in the X field, choose the horizontal grid spacing. 6. Under Reference Grid Spacing, in the Y field, choose the vertical grid spacing. 7. Click OK. TIP: To toggle the grid display on and off at any time, double-click the GRID setting on the status bar, click the Reference Grid tool ( ) on the Settings toolbar, or press F7.
30
4M
A. Click the check box to enable orthogonal mode. B. Click the check box to display the reference grid. C. Specify the x and y grid spacing. D. Click the check box to enable snap mode. E. Specify the x and y snap spacing. F. Click the check box to use an isometric snap and grid. G. Click the current isometric plane. H. Specify the grid rotation angle. I. Indicates the current grid rotation angle. J. Specify the x- and y-coordinates of the snap origin. K. Click to match the grid spacing to the snap spacing.
2. Click the Coordinate Input tab. 3. Under Change Settings For, choose Snap And Grid. 4. Under Snap Settings, click the Snap check box to turn Snap on.
progeCAD Architecture
31
5. Under Snap Settings Spacing, in the X field, choose the horizontal snap spacing. 6. Under Snap Settings Spacing, in the Y field, choose the vertical snap spacing. 7. Click OK. TIP: To toggle snap settings on and off at any time, double-click the SNAP setting on the status bar, click the Snap tool ( ) on the Settings toolbar, or press F9. In addition to setting the snap spacing, you can change the snap and grid orientation. You can also rotate the alignment of the grid or set it to create isometric drawings.
2. Click the Coordinate Input tab. 3. Under Change Settings For, select Snap And Grid. 4. Under Snap Settings, click the Snap check box to turn Snap on. 5. Under Reference Grid, click the Show Grid check box to turn Show Grid on. 6. Under Snap And Grid Settings, in the X Origin field, type the x-coordinate of the new snap origin. 7. Under Snap And Grid Settings, in the Y Origin field, type the y-coordinate of the new snap origin. 8. Under Snap And Grid Settings, in the Rotation field, type the grid rotation angle. 9. Click OK.
Default grid and snap alignment. Rotated grid and snap alignment.
32
4M
2. Click the Coordinate Input tab. 3. Under Change Settings For, select Snap And Grid. 4. Click the Isometric Snap And Grid check box. 5. Under Isometric Crosshairs, click the option for the isometric plane you want (Top, Left, or Right). 6. Click OK.
progeCAD Architecture
33
2. Click the Coordinate Input tab. 3. Click the Draw Orthogonal check box. 4. Click OK. TIP: To toggle orthogonal drawing on and off at any time, double-click the ORTHO setting on the status bar, click the Draw Orthogonal tool ( ) on the Settings tool-bar, or press F8.
When using entity snaps, the program recognizes only visible entities or visible portions of entities. You cannot snap to entities on layers that have been turned off or to the blank portions of dashed lines. When you specify one or more entity snaps, an entity snap target box is added to the crosshairs. In addition, an icon appears adjacent to the crosshairs indicating the active entity snap. When you select an entity, the program snaps to the snap point closest to the center of the target box.
34
4M
TIP: If you type the name of the entity snap, you need to type only the first three letters. To change the size of the entity snap target box 1. Do one of the following: Choose Settings > Drawing Settings. On the Settings toolbar, click the Drawing Settings tool ( Type settings and then press Enter. ).
2. Click the Coordinate Input tab. 3. Under Change Settings For, choose Entity Selection. 4. Under Entity Snap Aperture, change the value in the Aperture field. 5. Click OK.
A. Choose Entity Selection. B. Type or select the entity snap aperture size.
Setting entity snaps You can set entity snaps using any of the following methods: Choose Settings > Entity Snap, and choose the entity snap you want to set. On the Entity Snaps toolbar, click one of the entity snap tools. In the command bar, type an entity snap command. In the status bar, double-click ESNAP. Press and hold down the Shift key while right-clicking anywhere within the drawing window to display the entity snap shortcut menu, and then choose the entity snap you want to set.
progeCAD Architecture
35
You can also set entity snaps using the Drawing Settings dialog box. To do this, choose Settings > Entity Snap > Entity Snap Settings. The Drawing Settings dialog box is displayed with the Coordinate Input tab active. In the Entity Snap Modes list, click the check box for each of the entity snaps that you want to set. TIP: When you select an entity snap, a check mark appears next to the entity snap in the menu, the associated tool in the Entity Snaps toolbar is active, and the corresponding box is checked in the Coordinate tab of the Drawing Settings dialog box. The "Esnap" command can be activated either by holding down the "SHIFT" key and right clicking the mouse or by clicking the middle mouse button (if there is one available and active) or through the additional toolbar (version for Windows). The following menu will appear:
To snap to the endpoint, select anywhere on the entity near its endpoint (A).
To snap to the midpoint, select anywhere on the entity near its midpoint (A).
To snap to the center, select anywhere on the visible portion of the entity (A).
progeCAD Architecture
37
To form a perpendicular angle (A) to an entity (B), select anywhere on the entity.
To snap to a tangent, select the entity near the tangent point (A).
38
4M
On the Entity Snaps toolbar, click the Set Quadrant Snap tool ( Type quadrant and then press Enter.
).
To snap to a quadrant, select the entity near the quadrant point (A).
progeCAD Architecture
39
Select the two entities ([A] and [B]) to snap to a plan view intersection (C).
40
4M
1. Endpoint Snap 2. Nearest Snap 3. Midpoint Snap 4. Center Snap 5. Perpendicular Snap 6. Tangent Snap 7. Quadrant Snap 8. Insertion Snap 9. Node (point) Snap 10. Intersection Snap When fly-over snapping is enabled and multiple entity snaps are on, you can press TAB to cycle through the available entity snap points of the entities covered by the target box. For example, when the Endpoint and Midpoint snaps are set and the aperture box is on a line, pressing TAB will cycle between the line's closest endpoint and midpoint.
progeCAD Architecture
41
To set the Fly-over snapping option 1. Choose Settings > Entity Snap > Entity Snap Settings. The Drawing Settings dialog box opens to the Coordinate Input tab. 2. Click Fly-over. The Options dialog box opens to the Snapping tab. 3. Turn on the Enable Fly-over Snapping option. 4. Set the fly-over options. 5. Define the color, size, and thickness of the snap marker. 6. Click OK. 7. Click OK again TIP: You can also set the Fly-over option using the Options dialog box. Choose Tools > Options and select the Snapping tab to choose the fly-over settings.
Saving a drawing
To save a drawing, choose any of the following methods: Choose File > Save. On the Standard toolbar, click Save ( Type save and then press Enter. Type qsave and then press Enter. ).
42
4M
TIP: When you save a drawing the first time, the program displays the Save Drawing As dialog box so that you can choose a directory and type a name for the drawing. You can use any name when you first save the drawing.
A. Displays a description of the file size, creation date, and other information about the drawing. B. Unavailable when saving drawings; available only when opening drawings. C. Turns the drawing preview on or off. D. Saves the drawing with a password. E. Displays an image of the drawing before you save it.
To save a drawing with a new name or file format 1. Do one of the following: Choose File > Save As. Type saveas and then press Enter.
2. In the Save Drawing As dialog box, under Save As Type, choose the file format. 3. Specify the name of the file you want to create.
progeCAD Architecture
43
4. Click Save. TIP: You can also export drawing files to various file formats. For more details, see Exporting drawings.
2. In the Save Drawing As dialog box, under Save As Type, choose AutoCAD 2004 (dwg). 3. Click Password Protect. 4. Choose a folder where you want to save the drawing. 5. In File Name, specify the name of the file you want to create. 6. Click Save. 7. In the Password dialog box, enter a password. 8. If desired, record and store the password in a safe place. If you forget the drawings password, the drawing cannot be opened or recovered. 9. Click OK. Attention: It should be mentioned that the .dwg file that is produced from ProgeCAD Architecture, constitutes a model which includes the 3D entities (walls, opening, slabs etc) produced from ProgeCAD Architecture. In case that someone wants to edit this model through progeCAD or AutoCAD, all those 3D entities must be firstly transformed into 2D drawings (simple lines). This transformation can be easily achieved through the printview command, which is described in paragraph 2.10.
44
4M
In some cases, there are a number of different ways to create an entity. For the most part, one or two are given here. Refer to the online Help to learn how to create entities using other methods. When you use a tool or a drawing command, the program prompts you to enter coordinate points, such as endpoints or insertion points. You can enter the points or distances either using a mouse or by typing coordinate values in the command bar. As you draw, ProgeCAD Architecture also displays a context-sensitive prompt box with appropriate additional options for the type of entity you are drawing. After you create entities, you can modify them using the entity modification tools.
2. Specify the start point. 3. Specify the endpoint. 4. In the prompt box, choose Done to complete the command.
The prompt box provides several options as you draw. For example, when you draw the first line segment, you can specify its length or orientation angle. After you draw at least one line segment, you can click Undo to remove the previous line segment. You can click Done to end the line command. After you draw two or more line segments, you can click Close to complete the line command by drawing a line segment that connects to the start point of the first line segment you drew.
progeCAD Architecture
45
If the last entity you drew was an arc, you can also draw a line tangent to and starting from the endpoint of the arc. To draw a line as a continuation from the end of an arc 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Line. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Line tool ( Type line and then press Enter. ).
2. In the prompt box, choose Follow. 3. Specify the length of the line.
To draw a circle by specifying its center and radius 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Circle. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Circle Center-Radius tool ( Type circle and then press Enter. ).
46
4M
To draw a circle tangent to existing entities 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Circle. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Circle Radius-Tangent tool ( Type circle and then press Enter. ). Go to step 3.
2. In the prompt box, choose Radius-Tangent-Tangent. 3. Specify the radius of the circle. 4. Select the first entity to which to draw the circle tangent. 5. Select the second entity to which to draw the circle tangent.
To convert an arc to a circle 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Circle. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Convert Arc to Circle tool. ( Type circle and then press Enter. ). Go to step 3.
2. In the prompt box, choose Turn Arc Into Circle. 3. Select the arc you want to convert to a circle.
Start point-center-included angle ( ), or Start point-included angle-center ( or Center-start point-included angle ( ). Start point-center-chord length ( ), or Center-start point-chord length ( ).
progeCAD Architecture
47
Start point-endpoint-radius (
), or Start point-radius-endpoint (
).
).
To draw an arc by specifying three points 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Arc. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the 3-Point Arc tool ( Type arc and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the start point. 3. Specify a second point. 4. Specify the endpoint.
The prompt box provides additional options for drawing arcs. For example, after you specify the start point of an arc, you can choose Angle, Center, Direction, Endpoint, or Radius. You can select the options in a different order as well. For instance, you can draw an arc by specifying its start point, endpoint, and radius, or you can specify the start point, radius, and then endpoint. To draw an arc by specifying its start point, center point, and endpoint 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Arc. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Arc Start-Center-End tool ( Type arc and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the start point. 3. In the prompt box, choose Center. 4. Specify the center point. 5. Specify the endpoint.
48
4M
To draw an arc by specifying two points and an included angle 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Arc. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Arc Start-End-Angle tool ( Type arc and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the start point. 3. In the prompt box, choose Angle or type angle. 4. To draw an arc in a counterclockwise direction, enter a positive value for the included angle. To draw an arc in a clockwise direction, enter a negative value for the included angle. 5. Specify the endpoint.
If the last entity you drew was an arc or a line, you can also draw an arc tangent to and starting from the endpoint of the arc or line. To draw an arc tangent to an arc or line 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Arc. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Tangent Arc tool ( Type arc and then press Enter. ). Go to step 3.
progeCAD Architecture
49
Endpoint (A).
TIP: To convert an arc to a circle, on the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Convert Arc To Circle flyout tool ( ).
Axis-rotation ( Center-axis (
Center-rotation (
To draw an ellipse by specifying the axis endpoints 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Ellipse. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Ellipse Axis-Axis tool ( Type ellipse and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the first endpoint. 3. Specify the second endpoint. 4. Specify the half-length of the other axis.
First axis endpoint (A), second axis endpoint (B), and half-length of other axis (C).
Axis-axis (
). ). ). ).
Axis-rotation ( Center-axis (
Center-rotation (
To draw an elliptical arc by specifying the axis endpoints 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Elliptical Arc. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Elliptical Arc Axis-Axis tool ( ).
Type ellipse and then press Enter, and then type a (for Arc) and press Enter.
2. Specify the first endpoint. 3. Specify the second endpoint. 4. Specify the half-length of the other axis. 5. Specify the start angle of the arc. 6. Specify the end angle. NOTE: ProgeCAD Architecture draws elliptical arcs in the direction you specify. Go to Settings > Drawing Settings > Drawing Units tab. Under Change Settings For, select Angular Units. The default setting is counterclockwise.
First axis endpoint (A), second axis endpoint (B), half-length of other axis (C), start angle of arc (D), and end angle (E).
2. Specify the location of the point. To draw several points 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Draw Point. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Point tool ( ).
progeCAD Architecture
51
2. In the prompt box, choose Multiple Points. 3. Specify the location of each point. 4. In the prompt box, choose Done to complete the command.
2. Click the Entity Creation tab. 3. Under Change Settings For, click Points. 4. Under Point Display Type, select the style you want. 5. Under Point Size, select the point size, or choose one of the options. 6. Click OK. When you regenerate the drawing, all point entities change to reflect the new size and appearance settings.
A. To increase or decrease the point size, type or C Select the button for the Point Display Type that select a value. you want. B. To use one of the preset point size options, click the one that you want.
52
4M
To draw a ray 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Ray. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Ray tool ( ). Type ray and then press Enter.
2. Specify the start point. 3. Specify the direction. 4. To complete the command, press Enter.
progeCAD Architecture
53
Choose Insert > Infinite Line. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Infinite Line tool ( Type infline and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify a point along the line. 3. Specify the direction. 4. To complete the command, press Enter.
Point along the infinite line (A) and the direction (B).
You can also draw infinite lines at a specific angle or at an angle relative to an existing entity. To draw an infinite line at a specified angle relative to another entity 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Infinite Line. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Infinite Line tool ( Type infline and then press Enter. ).
2. In the prompt box, choose Angle. 3. In the prompt box, choose Reference. 4. Select the reference entity. 5. Specify the angle of the infinite line in relation to the selected entity. 6. Specify the location of the infinite line. 7. To complete the command, press Enter.
54
4M
To create a freehand sketch 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Freehand. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Draw Freehand tool ( Type freehand and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the length of the sketch segments. 3. Click the mouse button to place the Pencil tool ( ) on the drawing to begin sketching. 4. Move the pencil image to draw a temporary freehand sketch. 5. Click the mouse button to lift the pencil up to stop sketching. 6. In the prompt box, choose Write, Then Resume to write the temporary freehand sketch into the drawing. 7. Click the mouse button to put the pencil down again and resume sketching. 8. Click the mouse button again to lift the pencil up to stop sketching. 9. In the prompt box, choose Done to write the temporary freehand sketch into the drawing and end the command.
2. Specify the length of the sketch segments. 3. Select a point on the drawing to display the Pencil tool and begin sketching. 4. Click the mouse button to lift the pencil up to stop sketching. 5. In the prompt box, choose Delete On. 6. Move the Eraser tool ( ) to the beginning or end of the freehand sketch line that you drew, and then move it as far along the line as you want to erase. 7. Click the mouse button to put the Pencil tool down to resume sketching.
progeCAD Architecture
55
2. Choose the Entity Creation tab. 3. Under Change Settings For, click Freehand Sketches. 4. Under Freehand Sketching Methods, click either Freehand Command Creates Lines or Freehand Command Creates A Polyline. 5. Click OK.
A. Select the sketch method. B. Specify the default length of sketch segments.
56
4M
When you type a drawing command or select a tool, the program prompts you to enter coordinate points, such as endpoints or insertion points. As you draw, the program displays a context-sensitive prompt box with appropriate additional options for the type of entity you are drawing. After you create complex entities, you can modify them using the entity-modification tools. Several of these entity types require special editing commands.
2. Specify one corner of the rectangle. 3. Specify the opposite corner of the rectangle.
You can edit each side of a rectangle individually using the Edit Polyline tool ( ) on the Modify toolbar. You can convert the sides into individual line entities using the Explode tool ( ) on the Modify toolbar. You can control whether wide rectangle lines are shown filled or as outlines using the Fill tool ( ) on the Settings tool-bar. You can also use the Rectangle tool ( ) to draw a square. Instead of specifying the opposite corners, you specify the length of one side and the alignment of the square. To draw a square 1. Do one of the following:
progeCAD Architecture
57
Choose Insert > Rectangle. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Rectangle tool ( Type rectangle and then press Enter. ).
2. In the prompt box, choose Square. 3. Specify one corner of the square. 4. Specify the length of one side of the square by selecting its other end. The point you specify determines both the size and alignment of the square.
TIP: To control the line width of the rectangle, choose the Width Of Line option in the prompt box. After you change the width of the line, the new width setting remains in effect for subsequent rectangles until you change it again.
The vertex polygon drawing method creates an equal-sided polygon defined by its center point and the distance to its vertices. You specify the number of sides, the center point, and the location of one vertex, which determines both the size and orientation of the polygon. To draw a polygon by vertex 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Polygon. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Polygon, Center-Vertex tool ( Type polygon and then press Enter. ).
2. Type 5 to specify five sides for the polygon. 3. Specify the center of the polygon. 4. Specify the vertex of the polygon.
58
4M
2. Type 3 to specify three sides for the polygon. 3. Specify the center of the polygon. 4. In the prompt box, choose Specify By Side, and then press Enter. 5. Specify the midpoint of the side.
The center (A) and midpoint of one side (B). Resulting polygon.
You can edit each side of a polygon individually using the Edit Polyline tool ( ) on the Modify toolbar. You can convert the sides into individual line entities using the Explode tool ( ) on the Modify toolbar. You can control whether wide polygon lines are shown filled or as outlines using the Fill tool ( ) on the Settings toolbar.
progeCAD Architecture
59
After you draw at least one polyline segment, you can use the Undo tool ( ) to remove the previous segment. After you draw two or more polyline segments, you can use the Close option to complete the command by drawing a segment that ends at the start point of the first polyline segment you drew. Choose Done to complete the command without closing the polyline.
Curved polyline with tapered width.Polyline with straight Closed polyline. segments.
To draw a polyline with straight segments 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Polyline. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Polyline tool ( Type polyline and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the start point. 3. Specify the endpoint of each segment. 4. To complete the command, choose Close or Done.
With the Draw Arcs option, you can continually draw arc segments until you select the Draw Lines option to go back to drawing line segments. When you draw arc segments, the first point of the arc is the endpoint of the previous segment. By default, you draw arc segments by specifying the endpoint of each segment. Each successive arc segment is drawn tangent to the previous arc or line segment. If you choose Close while in the Draw Arcs option, the closing segment is created as an arc. You can also specify the arc using any of the following methods: Start point, included angle, center point Start point, included angle, radius Start point, center point, endpoint Start point, included angle, endpoint Start point, center point, included angle Start point, center point, chord length Start point, direction, endpoint Start point, radius, included angle
60
4M
To draw a line segment followed by an arc polyline segment 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Polyline. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Polyline tool ( Type polyline and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the start point. 3. Specify the endpoint. 4. In the prompt box, choose Draw Arcs. 5. Specify the endpoint of the arc segment. 6. To complete the command, choose Done.
Polyline start point (A), line endpoint/arc start point (B), and arc endpoint (C).
You can edit entire polylines and individual segments using the Edit Polyline tool ( ) on the Modify toolbar. You can convert polylines into arc and line entities using the Explode tool ( ) on the Modify toolbar. You can control whether wide polylines are shown filled or as outlines using the Fill tool ( ) on the Settings toolbar.
Drawing splines
A spline is a smooth curve defined by a set of points. You can use splines to create sculptured shapes such as the cross section of a turbine blade or an airplane wing. To draw a spline 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Spline. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Spline tool ( Type spline and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the first point of the spline. 3. Specify the second point of the spline. 4. Specify as many more points as you want. 5. When you have finished, press Enter. You can add tangents to the spline, which are lines that give it shape. To add tangents to a spline 1. Specify the starting tangent point. 2. Specify the ending tangent point.
progeCAD Architecture
61
Spline. Spline with starting tangent point (A) and ending tangent point (B).
2. Specify the first point of the spline. 3. Specify the second point of the spline. 4. In the prompt box, choose Fit Tolerance. 5. To accept the default of 0.0000, press Enter. To specify a different fit tolerance, type the number, and then press Enter. 6. Specify the additional points you need to draw a spline or a closed spline.
2. Specify the first point of the spline. 3. Specify the second point of the spline. 4. Specify as many more points as you want. 5. When you have finished, in the prompt box, choose Close. 6. To complete the command, specify the tangent point.
62
4M
2. Specify the inside diameter of the donut. 3 Specify the outside diameter of the donut. 3. Specify the center of the donut. 4. Specify the center point to draw another donut, or choose Done to complete the command.
The prompt box provides additional options for drawing donuts. For example, you can specify the width of the donut and two points on the diameter of the donut, or you can specify the width and three points on the donut. You can also draw a donut tangent to existing entities. TIP: A donut can be a completely filled circle by specifying an inside diameter of zero. To draw a donut tangent to existing entities 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Donut. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Donut tool ( Type donut and then press Enter. ).
progeCAD Architecture
63
2. In the prompt box, choose Radius-Tangent-Tangent. 3. Specify the width of the donut. 4. Specify the diameter of the donut. 5. Select the first tangent entity to which to draw the donut. 6. Select the second tangent entity to which to draw the donut.
Width (A) and diameter (B) of the donut and tangent entities (C).
You can edit donuts using the Edit Polyline tool ( ) on the Modify toolbar. You can convert donuts into arc entities using the Explode tool ( ) on the Modify toolbar. You can control whether donuts are shown filled or as outlines using the Fill tool ( ) on the Settings toolbar. TIP: You can control the default outside and inside diameter of donuts by choosing Settings > Drawing Settings, and then clicking the Entity Creation tab and choosing the options you want.
2. Specify the first point. 3. Specify the second point. 4. Specify the third point. 5. Specify the fourth point. 6. To complete the command, press Enter.
64
4M
After you select the first two points (A) and (B), the sequence in which you select the third (C) and fourth (D) points determines the shape of the resulting quadrilateral plane.
The prompt box provides additional options for drawing planes. For example, you can draw rectangular, square, or triangular planes. To draw a rectangular plane 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Plane. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Plane tool ( Type plane and then press Enter. ).
2. Choose Rectangle. 3. Specify the first point. 4. Specify the opposite corner. 5. Specify the rotation angle. 6. To complete the command, specify the opposite corner to draw another rectangle, or press Enter.
You can control whether planes are shown filled or as outlines using the Fill tool ( ) on the Settings toolbar. You can convert planes into individual line entities corresponding to the outline of the plane using the Explode tool ( ) on the Modify toolbar.
progeCAD Architecture
65
To make boundaries more specific, you can create a boundary set. A boundary set specifies which entities are considered in determining the boundary path. This can make creating the boundary polyline faster if you are working with a complex drawing. In the following figure, the circle and triangle are the selected entities. If you select an area anywhere inside the circle or the triangle, the result is a polyline that bounds the shaded area.
Selected entities (A and B).Point specified in the selected area (C), which results in a new boundary around the shaded area.
Rectangular polyline (A) with outer island (B), with point (C) specifying the area selection, and nested island (D).
You can choose from three island-detection methods. Nested Islands The outer entity and all its islands are considered for the polyline. Outer Only Only the outer entity and its outer island are considered for the polyline. Ignore Islands Only the outer entity is considered for the polyline.
66
4M
Nested islands (A), with outer island (B), and with ignore islands (C).
To draw a boundary polyline 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Boundary Polyline. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Boundary tool ( Type boundary and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the entities that you want made available for the boundary polyline by doing one of the following: All entities Select All Visible Entities to have all entities in the drawing considered when creating the boundary polyline. Custom selection Define only specific areas to be considered when creating the boundary polyline, which can improve system performance if you are working with a complex drawing. Click Select Boundary Set. In the drawing, select the entities individually or by choosing a selection method from the prompt box, and then press Enter. The Current Selection Set option becomes selected automatically, which indicates that the entities you selected with the Select Boundary Set button will be considered when creating the boundary polyline. NOTE: You can alternate between All Visible Entities and Current Selection Set without having to select entities again using the Select Boundary Set button. The Current Selection Set option uses the last set of entities you selected with the Select Boundary Set button. 3. Choose an island-detection option. 4. Click Select Area. 5. In the drawing, click inside the area whose closed perimeter forms the boundary, not on the polyline itself. If desired, continue clicking inside additional closed perimeters. 6. To complete the selection, press Enter. 7. In the Boundary dialog box, click OK.
progeCAD Architecture
67
A. Opens the drawing area for selection of entities to be considered when creating the boundary polyline. B. Choose to consider all visible entities when creating the boundary polyline. C. Choose to use the entities you selected for the boundary set. (Becomes available after you click the Select Boundary Set button.) D. Select an island-detection option. E. Opens the drawing area for selection of the enclosed areas used to create new boundary polylines.
68
4M
2. From the Boundary Hatch dialog box, click the Pattern Properties tab. 3. In the Pattern Type list, click Predefined. With Predefined, you can apply a scale factor to make the pattern larger or smaller than the default size. 4. For Scale, enter the scale factor as a percentage of the default. 5. For Angle, enter the angle of the pattern in degrees (1-360). The default angle is clockwise; you can change the angle of any hatch pattern by entering a numerical value. 6. For ISO Pen Width, enter the pen width. If you choose a predefined, ISO standard pattern, you can scale the pattern based on the ISO pen width. 7. To copy the pattern properties from an existing hatch, choose Copy Hatch Properties and select the hatch. 8. To associate the hatch pattern to its boundary entities, under Hatch Attributes, select the Associative check box. An associative hatch updates automatically if you move any of its boundaries. 9. To continue, add a hatch by doing one of the following: Select the entities you want to add a hatch. For details, see Selecting entities for hatching. Begin with step 2. Select an area or boundary you want to add a hatch. For details, see Selecting areas for hatching. Begin with step 2.
To specify a user-defined hatch pattern 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Hatch. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Boundary Hatch tool ( Type bhatch and then press Enter. ).
progeCAD Architecture
69
2. From the Boundary Hatch dialog box, click the Pattern Properties tab. 3. In the Pattern Type list, click User Defined. 4. For Spacing, enter the line spacing for the pattern. 5. To crosshatch the pattern, select the Cross-Hatched check box. You can choose to crosshatch the pattern. Cross-hatching imposes a copy of the specified userdefined pattern at a 90-degree angle over the first pattern you defined. 6. To copy the pattern properties from an existing hatch, choose Copy Hatch Properties, and select a hatch pattern from a hatched entity in the drawing. 7. To associate the hatch pattern to its boundary entities, under Hatch Attributes, select the Associative check box. An associative hatch updates automatically if you move any of its boundaries. 8. To continue, add a hatch by doing one of the following: Select the entities you want to add a hatch. For details, see Selecting entities for hatching. Begin with step 2. Select an area or boundary you want to add a hatch. For details, see Selecting areas for hatching. Begin with step 2.
A. Determines how the hatch will be defined. B. Determines density of hatching for Predefined hatch patterns. C. Sets angle of hatch in relation to entity (User Defined only). D. Determines density of hatching for User Defined hatch patterns. E. Sets pen width for ISO-standard pattern. F. Imposes another copy of the specified pattern at a 90-degree angle over the first. G. Closes dialog to allow selection and copying of existing hatch pattern properties. H. Displays the tolerance that non-touching entities can be within and still be used to create the hatch pattern boundary. I. Select to update the hatch automatically if you move any of its boundaries.
70
4M
To use a predefined library pattern 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Hatch. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Boundary Hatch tool ( Type bhatch and then press Enter. ).
2. From the Boundary Hatch dialog box, click the Pattern tab. 3. For Hatch File, select the icad.pat or icadiso.pat hatch pattern library file. 4. To select a predefined pattern, do one of the following: In the Patterns list, click the pattern name. Click the graphical representation of the hatch pattern.
5. To continue, add a hatch by doing one of the following: Select the entities you want to add hatching. For details, see Selecting entities for hatching. Begin with step 2. Select an area or boundary you want to add hatching. For details, see Selecting areas for hatching. Begin with step 2.
A. Hatch pattern library files. B. Hatch patterns listed by name. C. Hatch patterns shown graphically.
NOTE: Hatch patterns are memory intensive and can take a considerable amount of time to draw and display. To improve performance, add hatching as one of the last steps when you create a drawing, or insert hatches on a separate layer that you can freeze as you continue to work on your drawing.
progeCAD Architecture
71
2. From the Boundary Hatch dialog box, click the Boundary tab. 3. Under Island Detection Options, choose one of the following: Nested Islands The outer entity and all its islands are considered for hatching. Outer Only Only the outer entity and its outer island are considered for hatching. Ignore Islands Only the outer entity is considered for hatching.
Nested islands (A), with outer island (B), and with ignore islands (C).
4. To keep any new entities that are created for drawing the boundary hatch, select the Retain Boundaries check box. Existing entities are always retained. 5. Click Select Entities. 6. In the drawing, click the entities to be hatched individually or by choosing a selection method from the prompt box, and then press Enter when done. 7. In the Boundary Hatch dialog box, click OK.
72
4M
A. Choose to consider all visible entities when creating the boundary hatch. B. Mark the check box to keep any new entities that are created to draw the boundary hatch. Existing entities are always retained. C. (Display only) Indicates the boundary is created as a polyline. D. Determines how hatching interacts with islands. . Opens the drawing area for selection of entities to be hatched.
2. From the Boundary Hatch dialog box, click the Boundary tab. 3. Under Island Detection Options, choose one of the following: Nested Islands The outer entity and all its islands are considered for hatching. Outer Only Only the outer entity and its outer island are considered for hatching. Ignore Islands Only the outer entity is considered for hatching.
progeCAD Architecture
73
Nested islands (A), with outer island (B), and with ignore islands (C).
4. To keep any new entities that are created for drawing the boundary hatch, select the Retain Boundaries check box. Existing entities are always retained. 5. Specify the entities that you want made available for boundary hatching by doing one of the following: All entities Select All Visible Entities to have all entities in the drawing considered when creating the boundary hatch. Custom selection Define only specific areas to be considered when creating the boundary hatch, which can improve system performance if you are working with a complex drawing. Click Select Boundary Set. In the drawing, select the entities individually or by choosing a selection method from the prompt box, and then press Enter. The Current Selection Set option becomes selected automatically, which indicates that the entities you selected with the Select Boundary Set button will be considered when creating the boundary hatch. NOTE: You can alternate between All Visible Entities and Current Selection Set without having to select entities again using the Select Boundary Set button. The Current Selection Set option uses the last set of entities you selected with the Select Boundary Set button. 6. In the Boundary Hatch dialog box, click Select Area. 7. In the drawing, click inside the closed perimeter of a boundary, not on the boundary itself. If desired, continue clicking inside additional closed perimeters. 8. To complete the selection, press Enter. 9. In the Boundary Hatch dialog box, click OK.
74
4M
A. Opens the drawing area for selection of entities to be considered when creating the boundary hatch. B. Choose to consider all visible entities when creating the boundary hatch. C. Choose to use the entities you selected for the boundary set. (Becomes available after you click the Select Boundary Set button.) D. Mark the check box to keep any new entities that are created to draw the boundary hatch. Existing entities are always retained. E. (Display only) Indicates the boundary is created as a polyline. F. Determines how hatching interacts with islands. G. Opens the drawing area for selection of enclosed areas to be hatched.
progeCAD Architecture
75
2. Click the Display tab. 3. In the Change Settings For box, select Display. 4. Select or clear the Highlight Item When Selected check box. 5. Click OK.
76
4M
Entity-selection methods
When you choose a command that requires you to select entities (when youre deleting or changing entity properties, for example), you can use any of the following selection methods, which are displayed in a prompt box: Select all entities Selects all entities in the current drawing. Add to set Adds one or more entities to the selection set. Subtract from set Removes one or more entities from the selection set. Previous selection Selects entities included in the previous selection set. Last entity in drawing Selects the entity most recently added to the drawing. Window-Inside Selects entities contained entirely within a rectangular selection window. Crossing window Selects entities contained within or crossing the boundary of a rectangular selection window. Outside window Selects entities falling completely outside a rectangular selection window. Window polygon Selects entities contained entirely within a polygon selection window. Crossing polygon Selects entities contained within or crossing the boundary of a polygon selection window. Outside polygon Selects entities falling completely outside a polygon selection window. Window circle Selects entities contained entirely within a circular selection window. Crossing circle Selects entities contained within or crossing the boundary of a circular selection window. Outside circle Selects entities falling completely outside a circular selection window. Point Selects any closed entities that surround the selected point. Fence Selects entities crossing a line or line segments.
In addition to these methods, you can select entities that match a particular set of properties -for example, all entities on a particular layer or drawn in a certain color. You can also use a few selection methods automatically, without displaying the prompt box. For example, you can simply click to select entities, or you can use a WindowInside or Crossing Window by defining the opposite corners of a rectangular selection window. The direction in which you define the points of the rectangle (left-to-right or right-to-left) determines which type of window you create. To create a Window-Inside 1. Click to select a point in the drawing. 2. Click to the right of the first point to select a second point in the drawing.
progeCAD Architecture
77
This method is most commonly referred to as simply a window or selection window. To create a Crossing Window 1. Click to select a point in the drawing. 2. Click to the left of the first point to select a second point in the drawing.
Crossing Window by selecting the first (A) and second (B) points.
In addition to a rectangular window, you can define a selection window using other shapes such as a polygon, circle, or fence (a multi-segmented line that selects entities it crosses). To select entities using Window Polygon 1. Activate an entity-modification command. 2. In the prompt box, choose Window Polygon. 3. Specify the vertices of the polygon. 4. To complete the selection polygon, press Enter.
Window Polygon by specifying the vertices of the polygon (A, B, and C).
To select entities using Fence 1. Activate an entity-modification command. 2. In the prompt box, choose Fence.
78
4M
3. Specify the endpoints of the Fence segments. 4. To complete the Fence, press Enter.
Fence by specifying the endpoints of the fence segments (A, B, and C).
After you select one or more entities, you can choose an entity-modification command, such as Copy or Move, from the Modify menu or toolbar. You can also click the right mouse button to display a shortcut menu containing the entity-modification commands appropriate for the selected entities, and then choose the command from the menu. When you select entities and then issue a command, the program immediately acts on the entities youve selected. In many cases, a command-specific prompt box provides additional options for that editing operation. If you want to modify the selection set at that point, right-click to display the prompt box with the selection options and choose the option you want. To redisplay the command-specific prompt box, right-click again. You remove an individual entity from the selection set by selecting it again. To remove all the entities from the selection set, press Escape.
progeCAD Architecture
79
2. In the Drawing Settings dialog box, click the Display tab. 3. In the Change Settings For list, click Grips. 4. Change the desired settings, and then click OK.
A. Click to activate grips for all selected entities. B. Click to assign the color for grips. C. Specify the grip size. D. Displays the current grip size.
80
4M
You can modify all the properties of all entities simultaneously. For example, using the ai_propchk command, select all entities on a particular layer, and then move the entities to another layer by simply selecting a name from the Layer text box. In the Entity Properties dialog box, changes that you make in the Layer, Color, Thickness, Lineweight, Linetype, and Linetype Scale fields affect all selected entities. If you select several entities that all have different properties, the default value initially is Varies. Changes that you make in the entity tabs, such as Circle, Line, and Arc, affect all selected entities of that type. You can select the entities to be changed using any entity-selection method. To modify properties of entities 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Properties. On the Modify toolbar, click the Properties tool ( Type ai_propchk and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entities. 3. Make changes to the desired properties. You can also access many of the entity properties using the Entity Properties toolbar. Note that the Entity Properties toolbar settings that display when no entities are selected determine the properties of new entities when you draw them. The Properties Panel has two areas. The above area General that appears common properties for all selected entities, such as layer, linetype, linetype scale, lineweight, color etc.
By pressing the button with the arrow, the user can see the number an the type of the entities. The user can modify any common property. By selecting one entity, (eg line), the property panel change appearance and displays the properties of this selected entity. The user can modify any property of them.
progeCAD Architecture
81
Type delete and then press Enter. 2. Select the entities, and then press Enter. TIP: Typing the Undelete command restores the most recently deleted selection set. If you have made additional modifications since deleting the entities, use Undelete rather than Undo to restore those entities without reversing those modifications.
82
4M
2. Select the entities, and then press Enter. 3. Specify the base point. 4. Specify the displacement point.
Entity to copy (A), base point (B), displacement point (C) and Result.
To make multiple copies of a selection set 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Copy. On the Modify toolbar, click the Copy tool ( Type copy and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entities, and then press Enter. 3. In the prompt box, choose Multiple Copies. 4. Specify the base point. 5. Specify the displacement point of the first copy. 6. Specify the displacement point of the next copy. 7. Continue specifying displacement points to place additional copies. 8. To complete the command, press Enter.
To make multiple copies of an entity, select the entity to copy (A), specify the base point (B), and then specify the displacement points (C, D, and E).
progeCAD Architecture
83
To copy entities to the Clipboard 1. Select the entities you want to copy. 2. Do one of the following: Choose Edit > Copy. On the Standard toolbar, click the Copy tool ( Type copyclip and then press Enter. ).
Anything that you can copy to the Clipboard can be pasted into a drawing. The format in which the program adds the Clipboard contents to the drawing depends on the type of information in the Clipboard. For example, if you copy ProgeCAD Architecture drawing entities to the Clipboard, the program pastes them into the drawing as ProgeCAD Architecture entities. If you copy items to the Clipboard from other programs, they are pasted into the current drawing as embedded ActiveX objects. To paste entities from the Clipboard Do one of the following: Choose Edit > Paste. On the Standard toolbar, click the Paste tool ( Type pasteclip and then press Enter. ).
84
4M
2. Specify the distance by selecting two points or by entering a distance. 3. Select the entity to copy. 4. Specify on which side of the entity to place the parallel copy. 5. Select another entity to copy, or press Enter to complete the command.
To make a parallel copy, specify the distance between copies by entering a distance or selecting two points (A and B), select the entity to copy (C), and specify on which side to place the copy (D).
To make a parallel copy passing through a point 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Parallel. On the Modify toolbar, click the Parallel tool ( Type parallel and then press Enter. ).
2. In the prompt box, choose Through Point. 3. Select the entity to copy. 4. Specify the point for the entity to pass through. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4, or press Enter to complete the command.
To make a parallel copy passing through a point, select the entity to copy (A) and then specify the through point (B).
Mirroring entities
You can create a mirror image of an entity. You mirror the entity about a mirror line, which you define by specifying two points in a drawing. You can delete or retain the original entities. To mirror entities 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Mirror. On the Modify toolbar, click the Mirror tool ( Type mirror and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entity, and then press Enter. 3. Specify the first point of the mirror line.
progeCAD Architecture
85
4. Specify the second point of the mirror line. 5. In the prompt box, choose one of the following: Yes, Delete Entities deletes the original entities. No, Keep Entities retains the original entities.
To mirror an entity, select it (A), and then specify the first point (B) and second point (C) of the mirror line.
Arraying entities
You can copy an entity in a rectangular or polar (circular) pattern, creating an array. For a rectangular array, you control the number of copies in the array by specifying the number of rows and columns. You also specify the distance between each row and column. For a polar array, you control the number of copies that compose the array and whether to rotate the copies. To create a polar array 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Array. On the Modify toolbar, click the Array tool ( ). Type array and then press Enter.
2. Select the entities, and then press Enter. 3. In the prompt box, choose Polar. 4. Specify the center point of the array. 5. Specify the number of items to array, including the original selection set. 6. Specify the angle the array is to fill, from 0 to 360 degrees. The default setting for the angle is 360 degrees. Positive values create the array in a counterclockwise direction; negative values create the array in a clockwise direction. 7. In the prompt box, choose one of the following: Yes, Rotate Entities rotates entities as they are arrayed. No, Do Not Rotate retains the original orientation of each copy as it is arrayed.
86
4M
To create a polar array, select the entity to copy (A), specify the center point of the array (B), and then specify the number of items to array, the angle the array is to fill, and whether to rotate the items.
To create a rectangular array 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Array. On the Modify toolbar, click the Array tool ( ). Type array and then press Enter.
2. Select the entities, and then press Enter. 3. In the prompt box, choose Rectangular. 4. Type the number of rows. 5. Type the number of columns. 6. Specify the distance between the rows. 7. Specify the distance between the columns.
To create a rectangular array, select the entity to copy (A), type the number of rows and columns, and then specify the distance between each row (B) and column (C).
Moving entities
You can move entities around within the current drawing or from one drawing to another. The default method is to create a selection set and then specify a starting point, or base point, and an endpoint, or displacement point, to define the relocation of the entities. You can also relocate the entities using a direction vector.
progeCAD Architecture
87
To move a selection set 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Move. On the Modify toolbar, click the Move tool ( Type move and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entities, and then press Enter. 3. Specify the base point. 4. Specify the displacement point.
To move an entity, select it (A), and then specify the base point (B) and the displacement point (C).
You can also move entities using grips. To move an entity using grips, select the entity to display its grips, and then click a grip and drag it. The grip you select depends on the type of entity youre modifying. For example, to move a line entity, select the midpoint grip. To move a curved entity, such as an arc, circle, or ellipse, select the center point grip. Not all entities can be moved using grips. To move an entity using grips 1. Select the entity. 2. Click a grip to select it. 3. Drag the entity to where you want to relocate it. 4. Click to release.
Rotating entities
You can rotate entities about a specified point at a specified rotation angle or by an angle referenced to a base angle. The default method rotates the entities using a relative rotation angle from their current orientation. To rotate a selection set 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Rotate. On the Modify toolbar, click the Rotate tool ( Type rotate and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entities, and then press Enter. 3. Specify the rotation point. 4. Specify the rotation angle.
88
4M
To rotate an entity, select the entity to rotate (A), and then specify the rotation point (B) and the rotation angle (C).
To rotate a selection set in reference to a base angle 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Rotate. On the Modify toolbar, click the Rotate tool ( Type rotate and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entities, and then press Enter. 3. Specify the rotation point. 4. In the prompt box, choose Base Angle. 5. Specify the base angle. 6. Specify the new angle.
To rotate an entity in reference to a base angle, select the entity (A), specify the rotation point (B), select the base angle and pick point (B) again (or type the @ symbol), specify the second point (C), and then specify the point representing the new angle (D).
Reordering entities
When multiple entities overlap, you can change the order in which they are displayed and printed. You can move entities to the front, back, or on top or below of another entity. To reorder entities: 1. Do one of the following: Choose Tools > Draw Order. On the Tools toolbar, click the Draw Order tool ( Type draworder and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entity you want to reorder, and then press Enter. 3. In the prompt box, specify the new drawing order, and then press Enter.
progeCAD Architecture
89
4. If you are reordering above or under, select the entity you want the first entity to be above or below, and then press Enter. NOTE: The SORTENTS system variable automatically turns on, which may affect system performance.
Stretching entities
You can change the size of entities by stretching them. When you stretch entities, you must select the entities using either a crossing window or a crossing polygon. You then specify a displacement distance or select a base point and a displacement point. Entities that cross the window or polygon boundary are stretched; those completely within the crossing window or crossing polygon are simply moved. To stretch an entity 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Stretch. On the Modify toolbar, click the Stretch tool ( Type stretch and then press Enter. ).
2. In the prompt box, choose Crossing Window or Crossing Polygon. 3. Select the entities, and then press Enter. 4. Specify the base point. 5. Specify the second point of displacement.
To stretch entities, select them using a crossing window (A) or crossing polygon, and then specify the base point (B) and displacement point (C).
To stretch an entity using grips, you select it to display its grips and then select a grip to make it the active grip. This becomes the base point. Then you move the active grip to a new location. The grip you select depends on the type of entity youre modifying. For example, to stretch one corner of a rectangle, select the corner point grip. To stretch a line, select an endpoint grip. Not all entities can be stretched using grips. To stretch an entity using grips 1. Select the entity. 2. Click a grip to activate it. 3. Drag the grip. 4. Click to release.
90
4M
To stretch an entity using grips, select the entity (A), select a grip (B), and drag the grip to its new location (C).
Scaling entities
You can change the size of a selected entity by scaling it in relation to a base point. You can change the size of an entity by specifying a base point and a length, which is used as a scale factor based on the current drawing units, or by specifying a scale factor. You can also use a scale factor referenced to a base scale factor, for example, by specifying the current length and a new length for the entity. To scale a selection set by a scale factor 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Scale. On the Modify toolbar, click the Scale tool ( Type scale and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entities, and then press Enter. 3. Specify the base point. 4. Specify the scale factor.
To scale an entity by a scale factor, select the entity (A), and then specify the base point (B) and the scale factor.
You can also scale some entities using grips. To scale an entity, you select the entity, and then click a grip. You then change the size of the entity by moving the grip. The grip you select depends on the type of entity youre modifying. For example, to scale a circle, select a quadrant point grip. To scale an entity using grips 1. Select the entity. 2. Click a grip to select it. 3. Drag the grip. 4. Click to release.
progeCAD Architecture
91
To scale using grips, select the entity (A), click a grip (B), and scale the entity by dragging the grip to its new location (C).
Extending entities
You can extend entities so that they end at a boundary defined by other entities. You can also extend entities to the point at which they would intersect an implied boundary edge. When extending entities, you first select the boundary edges, and then specify the entities to extend, selecting them either one at a time or using the fence selection method. You can extend arcs, lines, two-dimensional polylines, and rays. Arcs, circles, ellipses, lines, splines, polylines, rays, infinite lines, and viewports on a Layout tab can act as boundary edges. To extend an entity 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Extend. On the Modify toolbar, click the Extend tool ( Type extend and then press Enter. ).
2. Select one or more entities as boundary edges, and then press Enter. 3. Select the entity to extend. 4. Select another entity to extend, or press Enter to complete the command.
To extend entities, select the boundary edge (A), and then select the entities to extend (B).
To extend an entity to an implied boundary 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Extend. On the Modify toolbar, click the Extend tool ( Type extend and then press Enter. ).
2. Select one or more boundary edges, and then press Enter. 3. In the prompt box, choose Edge Mode.
92
4M
4. In the prompt box, choose Extend. 5. Select the entity to extend. 6. Select another entity to extend, or press Enter to complete the command.
Select the boundary edge (A), and then select the entities to extend (B).
To extend several entities using the fence selection method 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Extend. On the Modify toolbar, click the Extend tool ( Type extend and then press Enter. ).
2. Select one or more boundary edges, and then press Enter. 3. In the prompt box, choose Fence. 4. Specify the first point of the fence. 5. Specify the second point of the fence. 6. Specify the next fence point, or press Enter to complete the command.
Select the boundary edge (A), and then specify the first point (B) and second point (C) of the fence.
When you extend a wide polyline, its centerline intersects the boundary edge. Because the end of the polyline is always cut at a 90-degree angle, part of the polyline may extend past the boundary edge. A tapered polyline continues to taper until it intersects the boundary edge. If this would result in a negative polyline width, the ending width changes to 0.
progeCAD Architecture
93
A tapered polyline (A) continues to taper until it intersects the boundary edge (B).
Trimming entities
You can clip, or trim, entities so they end at one or more implied cutting edges defined by other entities. You can also trim entities to the point at which they would intersect an implied cutting edge. When trimming entities, you first select the cutting edges and then specify the entities to trim, selecting them either one at a time or using the fence selection method. You can trim arcs, circles, lines, open two-dimensional and three-dimensional polylines, and rays. Arcs, circles, lines, polylines, rays, infinite lines, and viewports on a Layout tab can act as cutting edges. An entity can be both a cutting edge and one of the entities being trimmed. To trim an entity 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Trim. On the Modify toolbar, click the Trim tool ( Type trim and then press Enter. ).
2. Select one or more cutting edges, and then press Enter. 3. Select the entity to trim. 4. Select another entity to trim, or press Enter to complete the command.
To trim entities, select the cutting edge (A), and then select the entities to trim (B).
To trim an entity to an implied boundary 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Trim. On the Modify toolbar, click the Trim tool ( Type trim and then press Enter. ).
2. Select one or more cutting edges, and then press Enter. 3. In the prompt box, choose Edge Mode. 4. In the prompt box, choose Extend. 5. Select the entity to trim.
94
4M
Select the implied boundary edge (A), and then select the entities to trim (B).
To trim several entities using the fence selection method 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Trim. On the Modify toolbar, click the Trim tool ( Type trim and then press Enter. ).
2. Select one or more cutting edges, and then press Enter. 3. In the prompt box, choose Fence. 4. Specify the first point of the fence. 5. Specify the second point of the fence. 6. Specify the next fence point, or press Enter to complete the command.
Select the boundary edge (A), and then specify the first point (B) and second point (C) of the fence.
You can change the length of arcs, lines, and open polylines. To change the length of an entity by dragging 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Edit Length. On the Modify toolbar, click the Edit Length tool ( Type editlen and then press Enter. ).
progeCAD Architecture
95
2. In the prompt box, choose Dynamic. 3. Select the entity you want to change. 4. Specify the new endpoint or included angle.
Select the entity (A), and then select the new endpoint (B).
Breaking entities
You can break arcs, circles, ellipses, lines, polylines, rays, and infinite lines. When breaking entities, you must specify two points for the break. By default, the point you use to select the entity becomes the first break point; however, you can use the First option to select a break point different from the one that selects the entity. To break an entity 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Break. On the Modify toolbar, click the Break tool ( Type break and then press Enter. ).
Select the entity (A), and then specify the second break point (B).
To select an entity and then specify the two break points 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Break. On the Modify toolbar, click the Break tool ( Type break and then press Enter. ).
96
4M
3. In the prompt box, choose First. 4. Specify the first break point. 5. Specify the second break point.
Select the entity (A), and then specify the first (B) and second (C) break points.
TIP: To break an entity in two without removing a portion of the entity, specify the same point for the first and second break points by typing the at sign (@) and pressing Enter instead of specifying the second break point.
Joining entities
You can join two entities into a single entity. You can join either two lines or two arcs. The two lines must be parallel; the two arcs must share the same center point and radius. When you join two lines, the farthest endpoints remain at their existing locations; the program draws a new line between these points. Arcs are joined counterclockwise, from the first arc you select to the second. To join two entities 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Join. On the Modify toolbar, click the Join tool ( Type join and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the first arc or line. 3. Select the second arc or line.
Select the first arc or line (A), and then select the second arc or line (B).
Creating groups
When you create a group, you enter a group name and description, and then select the entities for the group. To create a group 1. Do one of the following: Choose Tools > Group. On the Tools toolbar, click the Group tool ( Type group and then press Enter. ).
2. Under Create New Group, enter the name and description of the group. 3. Click Selectable if you want all entities in the group to be selected when you select one entity of the group in the drawing. 4. Click Select Entities and Create Group. 5. Select the entities for the group, and then press Enter. 6. In the Group dialog box, click OK. TIP: You can enter the name of a group in the command bar when selecting entities.
Modifying groups
To modify a group and its entities 1. Do one of the following: Choose Tools > Group.
98
4M
On the Tools toolbar, click the Group tool ( Type group and then press Enter.
).
2. In the Group dialog box, select the group you want to modify. 3. Under Modify Selected Group, do one or more of the following: Enter a new name, and then click Rename Group. Enter a new description, and then click Change Group Description. Select whether you want the group to be selectable in the drawing. Click Add Entities to Group, select the entities to add to the group, and then press Enter. Click Remove Entities from Group, select the entities to remove from the group, and then press Enter.
4. In the Group dialog box, click OK. To change the order of entities in a group 1. Do one of the following: Choose Tools > Group. On the Tools toolbar, click the Group tool ( Type group and then press Enter. ).
2. In the Group dialog box under Modify Selected Group, click Re-order Entities. 3. In the Re-Order Grouped Entities dialog box, select the group you want to reorder. 4. To see the order of entities in the group, click Highlight. Follow the prompts that display to view the entities, one by one. 5. To reverse the order of all entities in the group, click Reverse Order. 6. To change the order of specific entities or a range of entities: In Remove from Position, enter the current position of the entity. In Place to Position, enter the new position of the entity. In Number of Entities, enter the number of entities or range of entities to reorder. For example, if you are changing the order of only one entity, enter 1. Click Re-Order.
NOTE The entities in a group are numbered 0, 1, 2, 3, and so on. 7. Click OK, and then click OK again.
Ungrouping entities
When you ungroup entities, the entities remain in the drawing but the group is deleted from the drawing. To ungroup entities 1. Do one of the following: Choose Tools > Group. On the Tools toolbar, click the Group tool ( ).
progeCAD Architecture
99
2. In the Group dialog box, select the group to delete. 3. Under Modify Selected Group, click Ungroup Entities. 4. Click OK.
2. Select the entity. 3. In the prompt box, choose Yes-Turn Into Polyline. 4. In the prompt box, choose another option, or choose Done to complete the command.
100
4M
4. In the prompt box, choose another option, or choose Done to complete the command.
Closing an open polyline adds a straight polyline segment between the first (A) and last (B) vertices.
2. Select the polyline. 3. In the prompt box, choose Fit. 4. In the prompt box, choose another option, or choose Done to complete the command.
Joining polylines
You can add an arc, line, or polyline entity to an existing open polyline, forming one continuous polyline entity. To join an entity to a polyline, that entity must already share an endpoint with an end vertex of the selected polyline. When you join an entity to a polyline, the width of the new polyline segment depends on the width of the original polyline and the type of entity you are joining to it:
progeCAD Architecture
101
A line or an arc assumes the same width as the polyline segment for the end vertex to which it is joined. A polyline joined to a tapered polyline retains its own width values. A polyline joined to a uniform-width polyline assumes the width of the polyline to which it is joined.
To join an arc, or polyline to an existing polyline 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Edit Polyline. On the Modify toolbar, click the Edit Polyline tool ( Type editpline and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the polyline. 3. In the prompt box, choose Join. 4. Select the arc, line, or polyline to join. 5. In the prompt box, choose another option, or choose Done to complete the command.
2. Select the polyline. 3. In the prompt box, choose Width. 4. Specify the new polyline width. 5. In the prompt box, choose another option, or choose Done to complete the command. To taper a polyline uniformly along its length 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Edit Polyline. On the Modify toolbar, click the Edit Polyline tool ( Type editpline and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the polyline. 3. In the prompt box, choose Taper. 4. Specify the starting width. 5. Specify the ending width.
102
4M
6. In the prompt box, choose another option, or choose Done to complete the command.
To move a polyline vertex 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Edit Polyline. On the Modify toolbar, click the Edit Polyline tool ( Type editpline and then press Enter. )
2. Select the polyline. 3. In the prompt box, choose Edit Vertices. 4. In the prompt box, choose Next Vertex. Repeat until the x reaches the vertex you want to move. 5. In the prompt box, choose Move. 6. Specify the new location for the vertex. 7. In the prompt box, choose another option, or choose Exit to stop editing vertices. 8. In the prompt box, choose another option, or choose Done to complete the command.
Select the polyline (A), move the current vertex marker to the vertex you want to move (B), and then specify the new vertex location (C).
To taper the width of an individual polyline segment 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Edit Polyline.
progeCAD Architecture
103
On the Modify toolbar, click the Edit Polyline tool ( Type editpline and then press Enter.
).
2. Select the polyline. 3. In the prompt box, choose Edit Vertices. 4. In the prompt box, choose Next Vertex. Repeat until the x reaches the first vertex of the segment you want to taper. 5. In the prompt box, choose Width. 6. Specify the starting width. 7. Specify the ending width. 8. In the prompt box, choose another option, or choose Exit to stop editing vertices and update the display. 9. In the prompt box, choose another option, or choose Done to complete the command.
Select the polyline (A), move the current vertex marker to the first vertex of the segment you want to taper (B), and then specify the new starting and ending widths for that segment.
To explode an entity 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Explode. On the Modify toolbar, click the Explode tool ( Type explode and then press Enter. ).
104
4M
A. Click to remove or retain portions of entities that extend beyond the chamfer or fillet. B. Click to create a chamfer using two chamfer distances (distance-distance method). C. Specify the first and second chamfer distances when using the distance-distance method. D. Specify the chamfer length and angle when using the distance-angle method. E. Click to create a chamfer using the chamfer length and angle (distance-angle method). F. Click to specify the fillet radius by selecting two points in the drawing. G. Specify the fillet radius.
progeCAD Architecture
105
Chamfering entities
You can connect two nonparallel entities by extending or trimming them and then joining them with a line to create a beveled edge. You can chamfer lines, polylines, rays, and infinite lines. When creating a chamfer, you can specify how far to trim the entities back from their intersection (distance-distance method), or you can specify the length of the chamfer and the angle it forms along the first entity (distance-angle method). When chamfering a polyline, you can chamfer multiple segments between two selected polyline segments, or you can chamfer the entire polyline. To chamfer two entities using the distance-distance method 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Chamfer. On the Modify toolbar, click the Chamfer tool ( Type chamfer and then press Enter. ).
2. In the prompt box, choose Chamfer Settings. 3. In the Drawing Settings dialog box, click the Entity Modification tab. 4. Under Chamfer Distances And Angles, click Distance-Distance. 5. Under Chamfer Distances And Angles, specify the first and second chamfer distances. 6. Click OK. 7. Select the first entity. 8. Select the second entity.
Select the first (A) and second (B) entities. The chamfer is drawn, based on the first (C) and second (D) chamfer distances.
To chamfer two entities using the distance-angle method 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Chamfer. On the Modify toolbar, click the Chamfer tool ( Type chamfer and then press Enter. ).
2. In the prompt box, choose Chamfer Settings. 3. In the Drawing Settings dialog box, click the Entity Modification tab. 4. Under Chamfer Distances And Angles, click Distance-Angle. 5. Under Chamfer Distances And Angles, specify the chamfer distance and angle.
106
4M
6. Click OK. 7. Select the first entity. 8. Select the second entity.
Select the first (A) and second (B) entities. The chamfer is drawn, based on the distance measured along the first entity (C) and the angle (D) formed with the first entity.
To chamfer all vertices in a polyline 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Chamfer. On the Modify toolbar, click the Chamfer tool ( Type chamfer and then press Enter. ).
To chamfer selected vertices in a polyline 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Chamfer. On the Modify toolbar, click the Chamfer tool ( Type chamfer and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the polyline along the segment where you want to begin the chamfer. 3. Select the polyline along the segment where you want to end the chamfer.
Select the polyline along the (A) and (B) - Result after chamfering. segments.
progeCAD Architecture
107
Filleting entities
You can connect two entities with an arc of a specified radius to create a rounded edge. You can fillet pairs of line segments, straight polyline segments, arcs, circles, rays, and infinite lines. You can also fillet parallel lines, rays, and infinite lines. When filleting a polyline, you can fillet multiple segments between two selected segments, or you can fillet the entire polyline. To fillet two entities 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Fillet. On the Modify toolbar, click the Fillet tool ( Type fillet and then press Enter. ).
2. In the prompt box, choose Fillet Settings. 3. In the Drawing Settings dialog box, specify the fillet radius. 4. Click OK. 5. Select the first entity. 6. Select the second entity.
Select the first (A) and second (B) entities. - Result after filleting.
To fillet an entire polyline 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Fillet. On the Modify toolbar, click the Fillet tool ( Type fillet and then press Enter. ).
108
4M
Choose Modify > Fillet. On the Modify toolbar, click the Fillet tool ( Type fillet and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the polyline along the segment where you want to begin the fillet. 3. Select the polyline along the segment where you want to end the fillet.
Select the polyline along the (A) and (B) - Result after filleting. segments.
When you fillet circles and arcs, more than one fillet can exist between the entities. The point at which you select the entities determines the fillet.
You can fillet parallel lines, rays, and infinite lines. The first entity must be a line or ray; the second entity can be a line, ray, or infinite line. The diameter of the fillet arc is always equal to the distance between the parallel entities. The current fillet radius is ignored.
progeCAD Architecture
109
110
4M
When you work in two dimensions, you need enter only the x- and y-coordinates; the program assumes that the z-axis value is always the current elevation. When you work in three dimensions, however, you must also specify the z-axis value. When you look at a plan view of your drawing (a view from above, looking down), the z-axis extends straight up out of the screen at a 90-degree angle to the xy plane. Positive coordinates are located above the xy plane, and negative coordinates are below the plane. All ProgeCAD Architecture drawings use a fixed coordinate system, called the World Coordinate System (WCS), and every point in a drawing has a specific x,y,z-coordinate in the WCS. You can also define arbitrary coordinate systems located anywhere in three-dimensional space. These are called user coordinate systems and can be located anywhere in the WCS and oriented in any direction. You can create as many user coordinate systems as you want, saving or redefining them to help you construct three-dimensional entities. By defining a UCS within the WCS, you can simplify the creation of most three-dimensional entities into combinations of two-dimensional entities. To help you keep your bearings in the current coordinate system, the program displays a coordinate system icon. When you begin a new drawing, you are automatically in the WCS, indicated by the letter W in the icon. When you display a drawing in plan view, you see the coordinate system icon from the top, with the z-axis directed straight toward you. When you display a three-dimensional drawing in a view other than plan view, the coordinate system icon changes to reflect your new viewpoint. TIP: The visible portions of the axes are the positive directions.
The ProgeCAD Architecture UCS icon looks different from the UCS icon in AutoCAD, because it presents more information. Three colors represent the three axes, making it easier for you to recognize the orientation in three-dimensional space: x-axis: red y-axis: green z-axis: blue
If you prefer a single color for the cursor and UCS icon, you can make that change with the config or options command.
progeCAD Architecture
111
You can also change the coordinate display to a different dynamic mode that shows the distance and angle (rather than x,y,z-coordinates) when the program displays a rubber-band line. To do this, choose Settings > Drawing Settings and select the Display tab. Under Coordinate Display, select the option for Coordinates In Polar Form For Distance And Angle Selection.
You can control the coordinate display from the Drawing Settings dialog box.
2. Select the point for which you want to find the coordinates. If the command bar is activated, the x,y,z-coordinates for the point you selected display in the command bar. If the command bar is not activated, the Prompt History window displays, showing the x,y,z-coordinates for the point you selected.
112
4M
When using absolute Cartesian coordinates, you need to know the exact point locations for anything you draw. For instance, to use absolute Cartesian coordinates to draw an 8.5-unit square with its lower left corner at 4,5, you must determine that the upper left corner is at coordinate 4,13.5, the upper right corner at 12.5,13.5, and the lower right corner at 12.5,5.
progeCAD Architecture
113
Drawing a square using the relative Cartesian coordinates method; enter C to close.
The first relative coordinate (@8.5,0) locates the new point 8.5 units to the right (along the x-axis) from the previous point of 4,5; the second relative coordinate (@0,8.5) locates the next point 8.5 units above (along the y-axis) the previous point, and so on. Entering C (for Close) draws the final line segment back to the first point specified when you started the Line command.
Drawing a tilted square using the relative polar coordinates method; enter C to close.
114
4M
NOTE: This example, like all examples in this guide, assumes the programs default settings: Angles increase counterclockwise and decrease clockwise. Thus, an angle of 315 degrees is the same as -45 degrees.
The right-hand rule helps you determine the positive direction of the x-, y-, and z-axes and the positive rotation direction.
Entering x,y,z-coordinates
When working in three dimensions, you can specify x,y,z-coordinates as absolute distances in relation to the origin (the 0,0,0 coordinate point at which the three axes intersect) or as relative coordinates based on the last point selected. For example, to specify a point 3 units along the positive x-axis, 4 units along the positive y-axis, and 2 units along the positive z-axis, specify the coordinate 3,4,2.
progeCAD Architecture
115
When you draw a line from a start point (A) to an endpoint (B) using spherical coordinates, you specify its length (C, in this case 10.2500 units), the angle in the xy plane (D, in this case 45 degrees), and the angle from the xy plane (E, in this case 35 degrees).
You can use point filters to center the circle by separately selecting the midpoints of two sides of the rectangle (A and B) and then specifying its radius.
116
4M
You can use point filters to draw a line by first selecting a point in the xy plane (A), specifying the z-coordinate (B), and then specifying the length of the line (C).
progeCAD Architecture
117
Rotate the current UCS around any of its axes. Align the UCS with its z-axis parallel to the current viewing direction. Align the UCS xy plane perpendicular to the current view.
When you define a new UCS, the UCS icon changes to indicate the origin and orientation of the new UCS. To define a UCS by specifying a new origin and points on the positive x- and yaxes 1. Do one of the following: Choose Settings > User Coordinate Systems. On the Settings toolbar, click the User Coordinate Systems tool ( ). Type setucs and then press Enter.
2. In the User Coordinate Systems dialog box, click Explore UCSs. 3. In the ProgeCAD Architecture Explorer, be sure that Coordinate Systems is selected, and click the New Item tool ( ). 4. In the prompt box, choose 3 Point. 5. Select the new origin. 6. Select a point on the positive x-axis. 7. Select a point in the positive y direction. 8. In the ProgeCAD Architecture Explorer - Coordinate Systems dialog box, type the name for the new UCS, and then close the dialog box.
Define the new UCS by selecting the origin (A), a point on the positive x-axis (B), and a point in the positive y direction (C).
118
4M
To select a preset UCS 1. Do one of the following: Choose Settings > User Coordinate Systems. On the Settings toolbar, click the User Coordinate Systems tool ( ). Type setucs and then press Enter.
2. Under Set The Selected UCS Relative To, select either Current UCS to change to the new UCS by reorienting relative to the current UCS or World Coordinate System (WCS) to base the new UCS orientation on the WCS. 3. Under Select UCS, click the button corresponding to the UCS you want as the new current UCS.
A. Specify whether to define the new UCS relative to the current UCS or to the World Coordinate System (WCS). B. Select to change the display to the plan view of the new UCS. C. Click to select the previous UCS. D. Click one of these buttons to select the view you want of a preset UCS. E. Click to select the WCS. F. Click to align the UCS with the current view. G. Click to display the ProgeCAD Architecture Explorer.
progeCAD Architecture
119
Information about drawing entities is stored in a database as floating point values, ensuring a high level of precision. Sometimes a drawing must be recalculated, or regenerated, from the floating-point database to convert those values to the appropriate screen coordinates. This occurs automatically. You can also manually initiate a regeneration. When the drawing is regenerated, it is also redrawn. To regenerate the current window, type regen in the command bar. If more than one window is displayed, type regenall to regenerate all the windows.
120
4M
To pan by specifying two points 1. Do one of the following: Choose View > Pan. On the View toolbar, click the Pan tool ( Type pan and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the pan base point either by typing the coordinates or by specifying a point in the drawing window. 3. Specify the pan displacement point either by typing the coordinates or by specifying a point in the drawing window.
Select the pan base point (A),and then select a second point (B) to specify the pan displacement.
To pan in real time 1. Simultaneously press Ctrl+Shift and click and hold the right mouse button. 2. Move the cursor in the direction you want to pan. 3. To stop panning, release the mouse button. To pan using a mouse with a wheel Rotate the wheel backward to pan up or forward to pan down.
NOTE: You must have the scroll bars displayed to use this feature. To display the scroll bars, choose View > Scroll Bars.
progeCAD Architecture
121
To pan using the arrow keys Press the up, down, right, or left arrow keys.
Zooming methods
To zoom, you can use any of the following methods: To define the portion of the drawing to zoom, create a window. To zoom in real time, use the mouse.
122
4M
If you have a mouse with a wheel, use the wheel button to zoom in and out.
To zoom in to an area using a window 1. Do one of the following: Choose View > Zoom > Window. On the View toolbar, click the Zoom Window tool ( Type zoom and then press Enter. ).
2. Select one corner of the window around the area you want to magnify. 3. Specify the opposite corner of the window around the area you want to magnify.
To specify a rectangular window around the area you want to magnify, select first one corner(A), and then select the opposite corner (B).
To zoom in real time 1. Simultaneously press Ctrl+Shift and click and hold the left mouse button. 2. To zoom in, move the cursor up the screen; to zoom out, move the cursor down the screen. 3. To stop zooming, release the mouse button. To zoom using a mouse with a wheel Rotate the wheel away from you to zoom in or toward you to zoom out.
Each rotation of the wheel away from you zooms out .8 times; each rotation toward you zooms in 1.25 times.
progeCAD Architecture
123
You can also change the magnification of the drawing relative to its current magnification by adding an x after the magnification scale factor. For example, if you type a scale factor of 2x, the drawing changes to twice its current size. If you type a magnification factor of .5x, the drawing changes to half its current size. To zoom to a specific scale relative to the current display 1. Do one of the following: Choose View > Zoom > Zoom In. On the View toolbar, click the Zoom In tool ( Type zoom and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the point you want located at the center of the new view. 3. Specify the zoom scale factor or the height of the drawing in drawing units.
Current view showing the point to be centered in the new view (A), and the new view zoomed using a scale factor of 2x.
124
4M
Zoom extents (displays all entities). - Zoom all (displays to drawing limits).
After you divide a single window into multiple windows, you can control each window separately. For example, you can zoom or pan in one window without affecting the display in any of the other windows. You can control the grid, snap, and view orientation separately for each window. You can restore named views in individual windows, draw from one window to another, and name window configurations individually so you can reuse them later. As you draw, any changes you make in one window are immediately visible in the others. You can switch from one window to another at any time, even in the middle of a command, by clicking the windows title bar.
progeCAD Architecture
125
To arrange all the windows and drawings vertically so they are placed side by side, choose Window > Tile Vertically. Arranging windows and drawings in this way displays each open window. The windows are resized to fit within the available space. ProgeCAD Architecture uses the commands in the following table to control its windows. ProgeCAD Architecture window-control commands Command
vports wcascade wclose wcloseall whtile wiarrange wopen wvtile
Result
Splits the current window into two, three, or four tiled windows. Cascades (overlaps) all open windows. Closes the current window. Closes all windows; also closes all drawings. Tiles all windows horizontally. Arranges window icons. Opens another window of the current drawing. Tiles all windows vertically.
2. In the prompt box, choose Create 2 Viewports, Create 3 Viewports, or Create 4 Viewports. 3. In the prompt box, choose the viewport orientation.
You can divide a drawing window into two windows arranged vertically (A) or horizontally (B); three windows arranged left (C), right (D), above (E), below (F), vertically (G), or horizontally (H); or four tiled windows (I).
126
4M
To join two views 1. Do one of the following: Choose View > Viewports. On the View toolbar, click the Viewports tool ( Type viewports and then press Enter. ).
2. In the prompt box, choose Join. 3. Click anywhere inside the window you want to keep. 4. Click anywhere inside the adjacent window you want to join to the first window. 5. Press Enter.
2. In the prompt box, choose Save. 3. Type a configuration name, and then press Enter. The name can be up to 31 characters in length and can contain letters, numbers, the dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_), or any combination. To restore a named window configuration 1. Do one of the following: Choose View > Viewports. On the View toolbar, click the Viewports tool ( Type viewports and then press Enter. ).
2. In the prompt box, choose Restore. 3. Type the name of the window configuration you want to restore.
progeCAD Architecture
127
Using the ProgeCAD Architecture Explorer, you can copy such elements as layers, linetypes, and text styles from one drawing to another. Like viewports on the Model tab, you can tile or overlap drawing windows; unlike viewports on the Model tab, drawing windows maximize or reduce to an icon.
Each drawing window that you open and work on retains in the Prompt History log all the commands that you perform, but the command line does not indicate when you have switched windows. When you work with more than one drawing open in its own window, you can easily move, cut, copy, and paste in between drawings. If you move an entity from one window to another and then want to undo this action, you must undo it in both drawings for it to take effect. If you copy an entity from one window to another and then want to undo that action, you must undo it from the drawing into which you copied the entity. If you cut and paste an entity and then want to undo that action, you must undo it in both drawings.
128
4M
progeCAD Architecture
129
Creating blocks
The tools and commands for creating blocks appear on the Tools toolbar and the Tools menu, respectively, when you set the program to the Advanced experience level. You can also use the ProgeCAD Architecture Explorer to create blocks. You can create blocks in two ways: By saving a block for use within the current drawing only. By saving the block as a separate drawing file that you can insert into other drawings.
When you create a block, you specify its name, its insertion point, and the entities that compose the block. The insertion point is the base point for the block and serves as the reference point when you later insert the block into a drawing. To create a block for use within a current drawing 1. Do one of the following: Choose Tools > Create Block. On the Tools toolbar, click the Create Block tool ( Type block and then press Enter. ).
2. Type a name for the block, and then press Enter. 3. Specify the insertion point for the block. 4. Select the entities that you want in the block, and then press Enter. The block is created and exists only in the current drawing. The entities you select are removed from the display, because they are now part of the block. 5. To restore the original entities to the drawing while retaining the new block, type undelete or oops. NOTE: If you frequently restore original entities after you define a block, you can customize the program to add the Undelete command to a menu or toolbar. You can create a block as a separate drawing file that you can insert into other drawings. To save a block as a separate drawing file 1. Do one of the following: Choose Tools > Save Block To Disk. On the Tools toolbar, click the Save Block To Disk tool ( Type wblock and then press Enter. ).
2. In the File Name field, type the name of the drawing file you want to create. 3. Click Save. 4. In the prompt box, choose one of the following: Multiple Blocks This option saves one or more existing block entities to a separate drawing file. When prompted, type the name of the block(s). All Entities This option immediately saves the entire drawing to a separate drawing file.
130
4M
Select Entities This option saves those entities you select to a separate drawing file. When prompted, specify the insertion point for the block, select the entities for the block, and then press Enter.
NOTE: When saving multiple blocks or saving the entire drawing as a separate drawing file, the program assigns the 0,0,0 coordinate as the insertion base point. You can change the base point by opening the drawing and redefining the block.
Inserting blocks
You can insert blocks and other drawings into the current drawing. When you insert a block, it is treated as a single entity. When you insert a drawing, it is added to the current drawing as a block. You can then insert multiple instances of the block without reloading the original drawing file. If you change the original drawing file, those changes have no effect on the current drawing unless you redefine the block by reinserting the changed drawing. You can also insert blocks from another drawing into the current drawing, using the ProgeCAD Architecture Explorer. Both drawings must be open at the same time to do this. When you insert a block or drawing, you must specify the insertion point, scale, and rotation angle. The blocks insertion point is the reference point specified when you created the block. When you insert a drawing as a block, the program takes the specified insertion point as the block insertion point. You can change the insertion point, however, by first opening the original drawing and redefining the block. To insert a block 1. Display the Insert Block dialog box by doing one of the following: Choose Insert > Block. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Block tool ( Type ddinsert and then press Enter. ).
2. In the Insert Block dialog box, under Insert, click Block Name. 3. In the Block Name box, select the name of the block you want to insert. 4. Click Insert. 5. Specify the insertion point for the block. 6. Specify the x, y, and z scale factors and the rotation angle, or press Enter to accept the default values. To insert an entire drawing into the current drawing 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Block. On the Draw 2D toolbar, click the Block tool ( Type ddinsert and then press Enter. ).
2. In the Insert Block dialog box, under Insert, click From File. 3. Type the path and the drawing file name, or click Browse to specify the file from the Insert Drawing dialog box, and click Open. 4. Click Insert.
progeCAD Architecture
131
5. Specify the insertion point for the block. 6. Specify the x, y, and z scale factors and the rotation angle, or press Enter to accept the default values. NOTE: You can specify the insertion point, scale factors, and rotation angle in the Insert Block dialog box before inserting the block. You can also control whether the block is exploded back into its original component entities after insertion. Under Positioning, clear the Position Block When Inserting check box, and specify the appropriate coordinates. If you want to explode the block immediately, select the Explode Upon Insertion check box.
A. Click and then enter the path and drawing file name to insert the entire drawing file as a block. B. Click to position the block when inserting. C. Specify the insertion point, scale factors, and rotation angle before you insert the block (available only when Position Block When Inserting is cleared). D. Click to explode the block on insertion. E. Specify columns, column spacing, rows, and row spacing. F. Click to insert the block. G. Click to select the block insertion point in the drawing before inserting the block (available only when the Position Block When Inserting check box is cleared).
Redefining blocks
You can redefine all instances of a block within the current drawing. To redefine a block that was created in the current drawing, you create a new block using the same name. You can update all the blocks in the current drawing by redefining the block. If the block was inserted from a separate drawing file that was subsequently updated, reinsert that block to update all other instances in the current drawing. To redefine a block in the current drawing 1. Do one of the following: 132 Choose Tools > Create Block. On the Tools toolbar, click the Create Block tool ( ). 4M
2. Type the name of the block you want to redefine, and then press Enter. 3. In the prompt box, choose Yes-Redefine Block. 4. Specify the insertion point for the block. 5. Select the entities for the block, and then press Enter. The block is immediately redefined, and all instances of the block in the drawing are updated. The entities you select for inclusion in the block are removed from the drawing, because they are now part of the block. TIP: To restore the original entities to the drawing while retaining the new block, type undelete or oops. You can update all instances of a block inserted from a separate drawing by reinserting the drawing.
Exploding blocks
You can explode an inserted block to its original component entities. When you explode a block, only that single instance of the block is affected. The original block definition remains in the drawing, and you can still insert additional copies of the original block. If you explode a block that contains attributes, the attributes are lost, but the original attribute definitions remain. Exploding dissociates component entities to their next simplest level of complexity; blocks or polylines in a block become blocks or polylines again To explode a block 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Explode. On the Modify toolbar, click the Explode tool ( Type explode and then press Enter. ).
progeCAD Architecture
133
Defining attributes
You add an attribute to a drawing by first defining it and then saving it as part of a block definition. To define an attribute, you specify the characteristics of the attribute, including its name, prompt, and default value; the location and text formatting; and optional modes (hidden, fixed, validate, and predefined). To define an attribute 1. Do one of the following: Choose Tools > Define Attributes. On the Tools toolbar, click the Define Attributes tool ( Type ddattdef and then press Enter. ).
2. In the Define Attribute dialog box, type the name, prompt, and default value. 3. Under Insert Coordinates, specify the location of the attribute, or click Select to select a point in the drawing. 4. Under Attribute Flags, select the optional attribute modes. 5. Under Text, specify the text characteristics. 6. To add the attribute to the drawing, do one of the following: Click Define to add the attribute and keep the dialog box active so you can define another attribute. Click Define And Exit to add the attribute and end the command.
A. Type the name you want to assign to the attribute. B. Enter the identifying prompt information displayed when you insert a block containing the attribute. C. Enter the default or constant value. For variable attributes, the default value is replaced by the actual value when you later insert a block containing the attribute. D. Specify the x-, y-, and z-coordinates for the attribute insertion point. E. Select to create a hidden attribute. F. Select to create a fixed-value attribute.
134
4M
G. Select to create an attribute whose value must be validated when you later insert a block containing the attribute. H. Select to create an attribute whose value is defined and not requested when you later insert a block containing the attribute, but that you can edit after the block is inserted. I. Click to add the attribute and keep the dialog box active so you can define another attribute. J. Click to add the attribute and end the command. K. Specify the text rotation angle, or click to specify the rotation angle by selecting two points in the drawing. L. Specify the text height, or click to specify the height by selecting two points in the drawing. M. Choose the text justification. N. Choose the text style from those styles already defined in the drawing. O. Click to specify the attribute insertion point by selecting a point in the drawing.
2. Select the attribute definition text to edit. 3. Modify the attribute name, prompt string, default value, and other attribute definition characteristics. 4. Click OK.
A. Modify the name assigned to the attribute. B. Modify the prompt that displays when you insert the attribute into the drawing.
progeCAD Architecture
135
C. Modify the identifying prompt information displayed when you insert a block containing the attribute. D. Modify the attribute insertion point. E. Modify the attribute text style and appearance. F. Modify the attribute insertion flags to create hidden, fixed-value, validated, or defined attributes.
2. Select the block to edit. The Edit Block Attributes dialog box displays all the attributes attached to the block you select. 3. Edit the attribute values as necessary. 4. Click OK.
A. Identifies the name of the block. B. Displays the names of all attributes attached to the block.
136
4M
C. Click to select attribute. D. Type the new value for the selected attribute. E. Click to update the attribute values and exit. F. Displays the value of each attribute attached to the block. G. Displays the prompt for each attribute attached to the block.
Before extracting attributes to a CDF or SDF file, you must create a template file. The template file is an ASCII text file that specifies the attribute data fields to be written in the extract file. Each line of the template file specifies one attribute field. ProgeCAD Architecture recognizes 15 different fields, which contain elements such as the block name, the x-, y-, and z-coordinates of its insertion point, the layer on which it is inserted, and so on. You can include any of these fields. The template file must include at least one attribute name. Each line in the template file must start with the field name. Block name and insertionpoint values must begin with BL:. The next nonblank character must be either a C (indicating a character string field) or an N (indicating a numeric field). This character is then followed by three digits indicating the width of the field (in characters). The final three digits indicate the number of decimal places (for numeric fields). In the case of character fields, the last three digits must be zeros (000). A typical template file is similar to the one shown here:
A. Field name. B. Block name. Block names must begin with BL:.
progeCAD Architecture
137
C. Insertion point. Insertion-point values must begin with BL:. D. Attribute tags. E. Number of decimal places for numeric fields or 000 for character fields. F. Field width for character or numeric fields. G. C for character fields; N for numeric fields.
To create a template file 1. Create a template file using any ASCII text editor (such as Microsoft Notepad or Microsoft WordPad) or a word-processing program such as Microsoft Word. 2. Include the necessary fields in the template file. 3. Save the template file in ASCII text format. To extract attribute information 1. Do one of the following: Choose Tools > Extract Attributes. On the Tools toolbar, click the Extract Attributes tool ( Type ddattext and then press Enter. ).
2. Click Select, specify the entities from which to extract attributes, and then press Enter. 3. Specify the format of the extracted file. 4. For CDF and SDF formats, specify the template file. 5. Specify the extract output file. 6. Click Extract.
A. Click to select blocks in the drawing containing attributes you want to extract. B. Click to specify the format of the extracted file. C. Specify the template file for CDF and SDF extracts. D. Specify the extract output file. E. Click to extract attributes.
138
4M
F. Click to specify the output file using a file dialog box. G. Click to specify the template file using a file dialog box. H. Indicates the number of blocks with attributes selected for extraction.
2. In the prompt box, choose Attach. 3. Specify the drawing file to attach as an external reference, and then click Open.
progeCAD Architecture
139
4. Specify the insertion point for the external reference. 5. Specify the x, y, and z scale factors and the rotation angle, or choose Done to accept the default values.
2. In the prompt box, choose Detach. 3. Type the name of the external reference you want to detach from the drawing, and then press Enter.
2. In the prompt box, choose Reload. 3. Type the name of the external reference you want to reload, and then press Enter. NOTE: The program automatically reloads all external references each time you open a drawing containing external references and each time you print or plot a drawing containing external references.
140
4M
To overlay an external reference 1. Do one of the following: Choose Tools > External Reference. On the Tools toolbar, click the External Reference tool ( ). Type xref and then press Enter.
2. In the prompt box, choose Overlay. 3. In the Select File To Overlay dialog box, specify the drawing file to be overlaid as an external reference, and then click Open. 4. Specify the insertion point for the external reference. 5. Specify the x, y, and z scale factors and the rotation angle, or choose Done to accept the default values.
2. In the prompt box, choose Path. 3. Type the name of the external reference whose path you want to change. 4. Type the new path, and then press Enter.
progeCAD Architecture
141
3. Type the name of the external reference you want to insert into the drawing, and then press Enter. To provide a copy of a drawing that contains external references, it is often easier to first bind the external references to the drawing. Binding the external references makes them a permanent part of the drawing, which is the same as inserting a separate drawing as a block. To bind an external reference to a drawing 1. Do one of the following: Choose Tools > External Reference. On the Tools toolbar, click the External Reference tool ( Type xref and then press Enter. ).
2. In the prompt box, choose Bind. 3. Type the name of the external reference you want to bind to the drawing, and then press Enter.
You can turn xref clipping on or off. When a clipping boundary is turned off, the boundary does not display and the entire external reference is visible, provided that the geometry is on a layer that is on and thawed. When a clipping boundary is turned off, it still exists and can be turned on. However, deleting a clipping boundary is permanent. After an external reference has been clipped, it can be edited, moved, or copied just as an unclipped external reference. The boundary moves with the reference. If an external reference contains nested clipped external references, they appear clipped in the drawing. If the parent external reference is clipped, the nested external reference is also clipped. TIP: You can also partially hide blocks using the xclip command. Clipping boundaries are moved, rotated and scaled along with the object.
142
4M
Example of an external reference clipped by a clipping boundary. The clipping boundary is the rectangle in the top view.
To define a rectangular clipping boundary 1. Type xclip and then press Enter. 2. Select the xrefs and/or blocks you want to be affected by the clipping boundary. All of the selected xrefs and blocks become highlighted. 3. Press Enter to complete the selection. 4. Press Enter to create a new boundary (the default option). 5. If prompted, press Enter to delete the existing boundary. 6. Choose Rectangular. 7. Define the first corner of the clipping rectangle. 8. Define the second corner of the clipping rectangle. The selected external reference(s) and/or block(s) are clipped by the rectangle. TIP: You can first select all blocks and/or external references, then right-click and select Xref Clip from the shortcut menu. To define a clipping boundary using a polyline 1. Type xclip and then press Enter. 2. Select the xrefs and/or blocks you want to be affected by the clipping boundary. All of the selected xrefs and blocks become highlighted. 3. Press Enter to complete the selection. 4. Press Enter to create a new boundary (the default option). 5. If prompted, press Enter to delete the existing boundary. 6. Choose Select Polyline. 7. Select the polyline to use as clipping boundary.
progeCAD Architecture
143
Xclip options Option On Off ClipDepth (3D only) Delete Generate Polyline New Boundary Effect Activates all clipping boundaries in the drawing. Switches off all clipping boundaries. Defines the clipping depth. Deletes the clipping boundary for the selected objects. Creates a polyline from the current clipping boundaries. Defines a new boundary. If a boundary already exists for the selected objects you are prompted to delete the current boundary.
If you want to see the clipping boundaries, you can turn on the xclipframe system variable. The xclipframe system variable determines whether the clipping boundary frame displays. When the clipping frame is on (set to 1), it can be selected as part of the object and plotted. To control the display of the clipping boundaries 1. Type xclipframe and then press Enter. 2. Choose On or Off from the context menu to toggle the display of the clipping boundaries.
2. Specify a file to attach, and then click OK. 3. In the Position dialog box, specify the position, origin, scale, insertion units, and rotation, and then click OK. 4. Specify an insertion point.
144
4M
5. Specify a scale.
2. Select an image. 3. Do one of the following: Select ON to make the images background transparent. Select ON to make the images background opaque.
To change the quality of all images in a drawing 1. Do one of the following: Choose Image Enabler > Image Quality. On the Image Enabler toolbar, click the Image Quality tool ( Type imagequality and then press Enter. ).
2. Do one of the following: Select High to use high quality images. Select Draft to use draft quality images, which require smaller amounts of system resources.
To turn an image frame on or off 1. Do one of the following: Choose Image Enabler > Display Image Frame. On the Image Enabler toolbar, click the Display Image Frame tool ( Type imageframe and then press Enter. ).
2. Do one of the following to toggle frames off and on: Select ON to display and print frames for all images in a drawing. Select OFF to hide all frames on the screen and during printing.
Choose Image Enabler > Image Management. On the Image Enabler toolbar, click the Image Management tool ( Type image and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the file you want to unload or reload. 3. Do one of the following: To unload the image so only its outer frame displays, click Unload. To reload the image so its contents display and print, click Reload.
2. Select the file whose path you want to change. 3. Press button Browse and find its new location. 4. Select Save Path to store new path.
2. Select the file you want to remove, and then click Detach.
146
4M
The tools and commands for many of the functions described in this section appear on the Draw 3D toolbar and the Insert menu, respectively, when you set the program to the Advanced experience level.
You can change the viewing direction to look at the drawing from a different vantage point or to work on a three-dimensional model from a different orientation. To set a new viewing direction 1. Do one of the following: Choose View > Preset Viewpoints. On the View toolbar, click the Preset Viewpoints tool ( Type setvpoint and then press Enter. ).
progeCAD Architecture
147
A. Click to select a non-axis viewpoint. B. Click to select the previous viewpoint. C. Click to select a viewpoint aligned with an axis.
You can dynamically rotate the viewpoint within the xy plane and relative to the xy plane, and you can pan and zoom the drawing. As you change the viewpoint settings, the drawing display automatically updates. To dynamically set a view direction 1. Do one of the following: Choose View > Dynamic View Control. On the View toolbar, click the Dynamic View Control tool ( Type viewctl and then press Enter.
2. Click the appropriate tools to dynamically change the viewpoint. 3. To complete the command, click OK.
148
4M
A Indicates the current viewpoint. B Click to pan the drawing. C Click to display the Preset Viewpoints dialog box. D Click to update the drawing display whenever you click a tool. E Click to zoom extents. F Click to zoom out. G Click to zoom in. H Shows the current viewpoint orientation. I Type or select the rotation angle increment. J Click to rotate the view about a predefined axis.
You can set the current viewing direction to the plan view of the current user coordinate system (UCS), a previously saved UCS, or the World Coordinate System (WCS). To display a plan view of the current drawing 1. Do one of the following: Choose View > Plan View. On the View toolbar, click the Plan View tool ( Type plan and then press Enter. ).
2. In the prompt box, choose one of the following: Current displays the plan view of the current UCS. UCS displays the plan view of a saved UCS. The program prompts you for the name of the UCS. World displays the plan view of the WCS.
progeCAD Architecture
149
You can create three-dimensional entities using any of the following methods: Draw two-dimensional entities in three-dimensional space. Convert two-dimensional planar entities into three-dimensional entities by applying elevation and thickness. Convert two-dimensional planar entities into three-dimensional entities by revolving or extruding. Create three-dimensional entities such as boxes, cylinders, cones, domes, spheres, and wedges.
You can change the default elevation and thickness values to create new entities withan elevation and thickness already applied. 150 4M
NOTE Three-dimensional solids are drawn as true solids with versions of ProgeCAD Architecture that support three-dimensional ACIS solids. Three-dimensional solids that you can create include: box, cone, cylinder, dish, dome, pyramid, sphere, torus, and wedge. To set the current elevation 1. Display the current elevation setting by doing one of the following: Choose Settings > Elevation. On the Settings toolbar, click the Elevation tool ( Type elev and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the New Current Value For Elevation, and then press Enter. To set the current thickness 1. Display the current thickness setting by doing one of the following: Choose Settings > Thickness. On the Settings toolbar, click the Thickness tool ( Type thickness and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the New Current Value For Thickness, and then press Enter. To set the current elevation and thickness using a dialog box 1. Display the Drawing Settings dialog box by doing one of the following: Choose Settings > Drawing Settings. On the Settings toolbar, click the Drawing Settings tool ( Type settings and then press Enter. ).
2. Click the 3D Settings tab. 3. In the Change Settings For list, click Surfaces. 4. To change the current thickness, in the Current 3D Thickness box, type a new thickness value or click the arrows to select a new thickness. 5. To change the current elevation, in the Current 3D Elevation box, type a new elevation value or click the arrows to select a new elevation. 6. Click OK.
progeCAD Architecture
151
A Type or select the current three-dimensional B Type or select the current three-dimensional thickness. elevation.
To change the thickness and elevation of an existing entity 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Properties. On the Modify toolbar, click the Properties tool ( Type ai_propchk and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entity, and then press Enter. ProgeCAD Architecture displays the Entity Properties dialog box. The exact appearance of the dialog box depends on the type of entity you select. 3. To change the thickness, in the Thickness box, type a new thickness value or click the arrows to select the new thickness. 4. To change the elevation, in the Z coordinate box, type a new elevation value or click the arrows to select the new elevation. 5. Click OK. NOTE When you change the thickness of an entity, you do not change the entity type. If you want to extrude an entity and convert it to a three-dimensional solid, use the Extrude command.
152
4M
. Type or select the new thickness. . Type or select the new elevation.
2. Specify the first point of the three-dimensional face. 3. Specify the second, third, and fourth points. 4. Specify the third and fourth points for additional faces. 5. To complete the command, press Enter. TIP Any or all edges of a three-dimensional face can be invisible to allow you to more accurately model entities with holes in them. As the program prompts you for the corner points, in the prompt box, choose Invisible Edge to make the next edge invisible.
progeCAD Architecture
153
2. Specify the number of vertices along the primary mesh axis. 3. Specify the number of vertices along the secondary mesh axis. 4. Specify the coordinates for each vertex. Specifying the coordinates for the last vertex completes the mesh and ends the command.
TIP Although creating rectangular meshes manually can be exacting, they are useful for representing complex surfaces such as three-dimensional terrain models. The Mesh tool is most useful when combined with scripts or LISP programs that mathematically calculate the coordinates of the vertices.
154
4M
To create a polyface mesh 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > 3D Entities > Polyface Mesh. On the Draw 3D toolbar, click the Polyface Mesh tool ( Type pface and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the coordinates of each vertex. After each vertex that you specify, the next vertex number is displayed, and you are prompted for the coordinates of the vertex. Specify the coordinates, and then press Enter. Continue to specify the coordinates for each numbered vertex. 3. To finish specifying vertex coordinates, press Enter. 4. Specify the vertex numbers that define the first face. You specify the face by entering the vertex numbers that were defined when you specified coordinates in step 2. Each face can be composed of three or more numbered vertices. 5. To finish defining the first face, press Enter. 6. Specify the next face by entering its vertex numbers. 7. To complete the command, press Enter. TIP To make an edge invisible, type the vertex number as a negative value.
2. Select the first defining entity. 3. Select the second defining entity.
Select the first (A) and second (B) defining entities. The resulting ruled surface mesh.
TIP To control the density of the mesh, change the values for the Number of MDirection Surfaces. Choose Settings > Drawing Settings, and then click the 3D Settings tab. Under Change Settings For, select Surfaces. Under Surface Settings, change the Number Of M-Direction Surfaces value. Or, on the Settings toolbar, use the Drawing Settings tool ( ) to display that dialog box.
progeCAD Architecture
155
Select the entity to extrude (A) and the surface mesh. The resulting extruded extrusion path (B).
TIP To control the density of the mesh, change the values for the Number of MDirection Surfaces. Choose Settings > Drawing Settings, and then click the 3D Settings tab. Under Change Settings For, select Surfaces. Under Surface Settings, change the Number Of M-Direction Surfaces. Or, on the Settings toolbar, use the Drawing Settings tool ( ) to display that dialog box.
NOTE An extruded mesh is different from an extruded solid. If you want to extrude an entity and convert it to a three-dimensional solid, use the Extrude command.
On the Draw 3D toolbar, click the Revolved Surface tool ( Type revsurf and then press Enter.
).
2. Select the entity to revolve. 3. Select the entity to be used as the axis of revolution. 4. Specify the starting angle. 5. Specify the number of degrees to revolve the entity.
Select the entity to be revolved (A) and the mesh. The resulting revolved surface axis of revolution (B).
TIP To control the density of the mesh, change the values for the Number Of MDirection Surfaces and N-Direction Mesh Density. Choose Settings > Drawing Settings, and then click the 3D Settings tab. Under Change Settings For, select Surfaces. Under Surface Settings, change the Number Of M-Direction Surfaces and N-Direction Mesh Density values. Or on the Settings toolbar, use the Drawing Settings tool ( ) to display that dialog box.
2. Select the first edge. 3. Select the second, third, and fourth edges.
progeCAD Architecture
157
TIP To control the density of the mesh, change the value for the Number of M-Direction Surfaces and N-Direction Mesh Density. Choose Settings > Drawing Settings, and then click the 3D Settings tab. Under Change Settings For, select Surfaces. Under Surface Settings, change the Number Of M-Direction Surfaces and N-Direction Mesh Density values. Or on the Settings toolbar, use the Drawing Settings tool ( ) to display that dialog box.
Creating boxes
You can create rectangular boxes, or cubes. A box consists of six rectangular surface planes. The base of the box is always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS. You position the box by specifying either a corner or the center of the box. You determine the size of the box by either specifying a second corner and the height; defining the box to be a cube and then providing its length; or specifying the length, width, and height. NOTE The box is created as a three-dimensional ACIS solid. To create a box 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > 3D Entities > Box. On the Solids toolbar, click the Box tool ( Type box and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the first corner of the base. 3. Specify the opposite corner of the base. 4. Specify the height.
To create a box as a three-dimensional surface To create a box as a surface instead of as a solid, the procedure is similar. 1. Do one of the following: On the Draw 3D toolbar, click the Box tool ( Type ai_box and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the first corner of the base. 3. Specify the opposite corner of the base. 4. Specify the height.
158
4M
Creating wedges
You can create three-dimensional wedges consisting of five surface planes. The base of the wedge is always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS with the sloped face opposite the first corner. The height is always parallel with the z-axis. You position the wedge by specifying either a corner or the center of the wedge. You determine the size of the wedge by either specifying a second corner and the height; defining the wedge based on a cube having a given length; or specifying the length, width, and height. NOTE The wedge is created as a three-dimensional ACIS solid. To create a wedge 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > 3D Entities > Wedge. On the Solids toolbar, click the Wedge tool ( Type wedge and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the first corner of the base. 3. Specify the opposite corner of the base. 4. Specify the height.
To create a wedge as a three-dimensional surface To create a wedge as a surface instead of as a solid, the procedure is similar. 1. Do one of the following: On the Draw 3D toolbar, click the Wedge tool ( Type ai_wedge and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the first corner of the base. 3. Specify the opposite corner of the base. 4. Specify the height.
Creating cones
You can create three-dimensional cones defined by a circular base and tapering to a point perpendicular to the base. The base of the cone is always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS; the height of the cone is always parallel with the z-axis. You position the cone by specifying the center of the base. You determine the size of the cone by specifying either the radius or the diameter of the base and the height. NOTE The cone is created as a three-dimensional ACIS solid.
progeCAD Architecture
159
To create a cone
1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > 3D Entities > Cone. On the Solids toolbar, click the Cone tool ( Type cone and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the center of the base of the cone. 3. Specify the radius or diameter. 4. Specify the height.
To create a cone as a three-dimensional surface To create a cone as a surface instead of as a solid, the procedure is similar. 1. Do one of the following: On the Draw 3D toolbar, click the Cone tool ( Type ai_cone and then press Enter. )
2. Specify the center of the base of the cone. 3. Specify the radius or diameter. 4. Specify the height.
Creating pyramids
You can create tetrahedrons (three-sided pyramids) or four-sided pyramids. The sides of the resulting pyramid can meet at a point (the apex) or can form a three- or fouredged top. The sides of a four-sided pyramid can also meet along a ridge defined by two points. The base of the pyramid is always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS. You position the pyramid by specifying a corner of the base. You determine the size of the pyramid by specifying the base points and either the apex, the corners of the top surface, or the endpoints of the ridge. NOTE The tetrahedron and pyramid are created as three-dimensional ACIS solids. To create a tetrahedron 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > 3D Entities > Pyramid. On the Solids toolbar, click the Pyramid tool ( Type pyramid and then press Enter. ).
160
4M
3. Specify the second and third points. 4. In the prompt box, choose Tetrahedron. 5. Specify the apex of the tetrahedron.
To create a pyramid with a planar top 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > 3D Entities > Pyramid. On the Solids toolbar, click the Pyramid tool ( Type pyramid and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the first point for the base of the pyramid. 3. Specify the second, third, and fourth points. 4. In the prompt box, choose Top Surface. 5. Specify the first point on the top surface of the pyramid. 6. Specify the second, third, and fourth points.
To create a pyramid as a three-dimensional surface To create a pyramid as a surface instead of as a solid, the procedure is similar. 1. Do one of the following: On the Draw 3D toolbar, click the Pyramid tool ( Type ai_pyramid and then press Enter. ).
progeCAD Architecture
161
Creating cylinders
You can create cylinders defined by a circular base. The base of a cylinder is always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS; the height of a cylinder is always parallel with the z-axis. You position a cylinder by specifying the center of the base. You determine the size of a cylinder by specifying either the radius or diameter of the base and the height. NOTE The cylinder is created as a three-dimensional ACIS solid. To create a cylinder 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > 3D Entities > Cylinder. On the Solids toolbar, click the Cylinder tool ( ). Type cylinder and then press Enter.
2. Specify the center of the base of the cylinder. 3. Specify the radius or diameter. 4. Specify the height.
To create a cylinder as a three-dimensional surface To create a cylinder as a surface instead of as a solid, the procedure is similar. 1. Do one of the following: On the Draw 3D toolbar, click the Cylinder tool ( Type ai_cylinder and then press Enter. ).
Creating spheres
You can create spheres. The latitude lines of a sphere are always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS; the central axis is always parallel with the z-axis. You position a sphere by specifying its center point. You determine the size of a sphere by specifying either its radius or its diameter. NOTE The sphere is created as a three-dimensional ACIS solid. To create a sphere 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > 3D Entities > Sphere. On the Solids toolbar, click the Sphere tool ( ).
162
4M
To create a sphere as a three-dimensional surface To create a sphere as a surface instead of as a solid, the procedure is similar. 1. Do one of the following: On the Draw 3D toolbar, click the Sphere tool ( Type ai_sphere and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the center of the sphere. 3. Specify the radius or diameter. 4. Specify the number of longitudinal sections that are perpendicular to the xy plane. 5. Specify the number of latitudinal sections that are parallel to the xy plane.
Creating dishes
You can create a three-dimensional dish. The latitude lines of a dish are always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS; the central axis is always parallel with the z-axis. You position a dish by specifying its center point. You determine the size of a dish by specifying either its radius or its diameter. NOTE The dish is created as a three-dimensional ACIS solid. To create a dish 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > 3D Entities > Dish. On the Solids toolbar, click the Dish tool ( Type dish and then press Enter. ).
progeCAD Architecture
163
To create a dish as a three-dimensional surface To create a dish as a surface instead of as a solid, the procedure is similar. 1. Do one of the following: On the Draw 3D toolbar, click the Dish tool ( Type ai_dish and then press Enter. ).
Creating domes
You can create a three-dimensional dome. The latitude lines of a dome are always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS; the central axis is always parallel with the z-axis. You position a dome by specifying its center point. You determine the size of a dome by specifying either its radius or its diameter. NOTE The dome is created as a three-dimensional ACIS solid. To create a dome 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > 3D Entities > Dome. On the Solids toolbar, click the Dome tool ( Type dome and then press Enter. ).
To create a dome as a three-dimensional surface To create a dome as a surface instead of as a solid, the procedure is similar. 1. Do one of the following: On the Draw 3D toolbar, click the Dome tool ( Type ai_dome and then press Enter. )
164
4M
Creating tori
You can create a three-dimensional donut or ring-shaped entity known as a torus. The diameter of a ring is always parallel with the xy plane of the current UCS. A torus is constructed by revolving a circle about a line drawn in the plane of the circle and parallel with the z-axis of the current UCS. You position a torus by specifying its center point. You determine the size of a torus by specifying its overall diameter or radius and the diameter or radius of the tube (the circle being revolved). NOTE The torus is created as a three-dimensional ACIS solid. To create a torus 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > 3D Entities > Torus. On the Solids toolbar, click the Torus tool ( Type torus and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the center of the whole torus. 3. Specify the radius or diameter of the whole torus. 4. Specify the radius or diameter of the body of the torus.
To create a torus as a three-dimensional surface To create a torus as a surface instead of as a solid, the procedure is similar. 1. Do one of the following: On the Draw 3D toolbar, click the Torus tool ( Type ai_torus and then press Enter. ).
2. Specify the center of the whole torus. 3. Specify the radius or diameter of the whole torus. 4. Specify the radius or diameter of the body of the torus. 5. Specify the number of longitudinal sections that are perpendicular to the xy plane. 6. Specify the number of latitudinal sections that are parallel to the xy plane.
Creating regions
You can convert a closed entity into a two-dimensional region. After you create a region, you can modify it using the various three-dimensional tools. For example, you can create a region from a square, and then extrude the square to create a threedimensional cube.
progeCAD Architecture
165
You can create regions from closed entities, such as polylines, polygons, circles, ellipses, closed splines, and donuts. Creating regions typically has no visible effect on a drawing. However, if the original entity had a width or lineweight, that information is lost when you create the region. To create a region 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Region. On the Modify toolbar, click the Region tool ( Type region and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entities to create the region. 3. Press Enter. The command bar displays a message that describes how many regions were created.
2. Select the entity to extrude. 3. Select the extrusion path, or specify the height.
2. Select the entity to revolve. 3. Do one of the following to define the axis of revolution:
166
4M
Specify a start point and an end point. Type o and press Enter to select an entity that determines the axis. Type x and press Enter to select the x-axis. Type y and press Enter to select the y-axis.
To subtract solids 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Solid Editing > Subtract. On the Solids Editing toolbar, click the Subtract tool ( Type subtract and then press Enter. ).
progeCAD Architecture
167
To intersect solids 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Solid Editing > Intersect. On the Solids Editing toolbar, click the Intersect tool ( Type intersect and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entities to rotate, and then press Enter. 3. Choose from one of the following options: Entity, Last, View, Xaxis, Yaxis, Zaxis.
168
4M
2. Select the entities, and then press Enter. 3. In the prompt box, choose Rectangular. 4. Type the number of rows in the array. 5. Type the number of columns. 6. Type the number of levels. 7. Specify the vertical distance between the rows. 8. Specify the horizontal distance between the columns. 9. Specify the depth between the levels.
progeCAD Architecture
169
To create a three-dimensional polar array 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > 3D Array. On the Modify toolbar, click the 3D Array tool ( Type 3Darray and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entities, and then press Enter. 3. In the prompt box, choose Polar. 4. Type the number of copies to make, including the original selection set. 5. Specify the angle the array is to fill, from 0 to 360 degrees. The default setting for the angle is 360 degrees. Positive values create the array in a counterclockwise direction; negative values create the array in a clockwise direction. 6. In the prompt box, choose one of the following: Yes-Rotate Entities to rotate entities as they are arrayed. No-Do Not Rotate to retain the original orientation of each copy as it is arrayed.
7. Specify the center point of the array. 8. Specify a second point along the central axis of the array.
170
4M
3. In the prompt box, choose 3 Points, or press Enter to select the default. 4. Specify the first point on the mirror plane. 5. Specify the second and third points on the plane. 6. In the prompt box, choose one of the following: Yes-Delete Entities to delete the original entities. No-Keep Entities to retain the original entities.
2. Select the entities, and then press Enter. 3. Specify the first source point. 4. Specify the first destination point 5. Specify additional source and destination points if desired (up to three pairs).
C D
A B
2. Select the edge of the base surface to chamfer. (One of two surfaces adjacent to the selected edge will be highlighted.) 3. Do one of the following: To select a different surface, type n and press Enter. To use the current surface, press Enter.
4. Specify the base surface distance (measured from the selected edge to the base surface). 5. Specify the adjacent surface distance (measured from the selected edge to the adjacent surface). 6. Do one of the following: Specify the edges to chamfer. To select all edges around the base surface, type l and press Enter.
To fillet a solid 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Fillet. On the Modify toolbar, click the Fillet tool ( Type fillet and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the edge of the solid to fillet. 3. Specify the fillet radius. 4. Select additional edges to fillet, and press Enter to fillet.
172
4M
2. Select the entities to cross-section. 3. Do one of the following: Specify three points to define the cross-section plane. (The first point defines the origin, while the second point defines the x-axis and the third point defines the y-axis.) Type o and press Enter to select an entity that defines the cross-sectional plane. Specify an axis by typing the appropriate letter and pressing Enter.
To slice a solid 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > 3D Entities > Slice. On the Solids toolbar, click the Slice tool ( Type slice and then press Enter. ).
2. Select the entities to slice. 3. Do one of the following: Specify three points to define the cross-section plane. (The first point defines the origin, while the second point defines the x-axis and the third point defines the y-axis.) Type o and press Enter to select an entity that defines the cross-sectional plane. Specify an axis by typing the appropriate letter and pressing Enter.
2. Select the entity with the face you want to extrude. 3. Select the face(s) to extrude, and press Enter. 4. Do one of the following: Specify the height of extrusion. Type p and press Enter to select a path for extrusion.
progeCAD Architecture
173
To move a solid face 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Solid Editing > Move Face. On the Solids Editing toolbar, click the Move Face tool ( ).
2. Select the entity with the face you want to move. 3. Select the face(s) to move, and press Enter. 4. Specify a base point. 5. Specify an end point.
C A B
To rotate a solid face 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Solid Editing > Rotate Face. On the Solids Editing toolbar, click the Rotate Face tool ( ).
2. Select the entity with the face you want to rotate. 3. Select the face(s) to rotate, and press Enter. 4. Specify a base point. 5. Specify another point on the rotation axis. 6. Specify the rotation angle.
174
4M
To offset a solid face 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Solid Editing > Offset Face. On the Solids Editing toolbar, click the Offset Face tool ( ).
2. Select the entity with the face you want to offset. 3. Select the face(s) to offset, and press Enter. 4. Specify an offset distance.
To taper a solid face 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Solid Editing > Taper Faces. On the Solids Editing toolbar, click the Taper Face tool ( ).
2. Select the entity with the face you want to taper. 3. Select the face(s) to taper, and press Enter. 4. Specify a base point. 5. Specify another point along the axis. 6. Specify a taper angle.
progeCAD Architecture
175
To delete a solid face 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Solid Editing > Delete Face. On the Solids Editing toolbar, click the Delete Face tool ( ).
2. Select the entity with the face you want to delete. 3. Select the face(s) to delete, and press Enter.
To copy a solid face 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Solid Editing > Copy Face. On the Solids Editing toolbar, click the Copy Face tool ( ).
2. Select the entity with the face you want to copy. 3. Select the face(s) to copy, and press Enter. 4. Specify a base point. 5. Specify an end point.
To color a face 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Solid Editing > Color Face. On the Solids Editing toolbar, click the Color Face tool ( ).
2. Select the entity with the face you want to color. 3. Select the face(s) to color, and press Enter. 4. Specify a color. 176 4M
2. Select the entity with the edge you want to copy. 3. Select the edge(s) to copy, and press Enter. 4. Specify a base point. 5. Specify an end point.
To color an edge 1. Do one of the following: Choose Modify > Solid Editing > Color Edge. On the Solids Editing toolbar, click the Color Edge tool ( ).
2. Select the entity with the edge you want to color. 3. Select the edge(s) to color, and press Enter. 4. Specify a color.
Choose Modify > Solid Editing > Imprint. On the Solids Editing toolbar, click the Imprint tool ( ).
2. Select the solid entity you want to imprint. 3. Select the entity you want to imprint on the solid.
2. Select the entity you want to shell. 3. Remove any faces you dont want to include. 4. Specify an offset distance.
2. Choose the directory containing the SAT file. 3. Choose the SAT file you want to open. 4. Click Open. To export an ACIS file 1. Do one of the following: Choose File > Acis Out. Type acisout and then press Enter.
2. Select the ACIS entities you want to save. 3. Specify the name of the file you want to create. 4. Click Save.
progeCAD Architecture
179
2.10 Printing
The printing of a drawing to a printer or a plotter, or even to a file is accomplished through the PRINT (or PLOT) command, either clicking on the command located at the FILE group of commands, or through the command line, given that a drawing has been already loaded. More details about the printing procedure and the related options are given in the next paragraph.
180
4M
ProgeCAD Architecture provides an additional work area, called paper space. The contents of paper space represent the paper layout of your drawing. In this work area, you can create and arrange different views of your model similar to the way you arrange detail drawings or orthogonal views of a model on a sheet of paper. You can also add keynotes, annotations, borders, title blocks, and other print-related entities in paper space, which reduces clutter when you work with your model in model space. You view and work in paper space while using a Layout tab. Each view, or layout viewport, that you create in paper space provides a window of your drawing in model space. You can create one layout viewport or several. You can place layout viewports anywhere on the screen; their edges can be touching or not; and you can print them all at the same time. You do not need to use paper space to print your drawing, but it offers several advantages: Print the same drawing with different print settings that you save with each layout, for example, pen widths, printer configuration files, lineweight settings, drawing scale, and more. Add print-related entities that are not essential to the model itself, such as keynotes or annotations, to reduce clutter when you work with your model in model space on the Model tab. For a single layout, create multiple layout viewports that print the model at different views and scales.
progeCAD Architecture
181
The first time you switch to a Layout tab, your drawing seems to disappear. This is normal. You must create at least one layout viewport to see your work. To view your drawing in model space using a Layout tab 1. Click the desired Layout tab. 2. Create and view a layout viewport. NOTE: You can switch between model space and paper space using the Model/Paper toggle in the status bar, or by typing mspace or pspace.
182
4M
2. Type a unique name for your layout and then press Enter. The name can be up to 255 characters in length and can contain letters, numbers, the dollar sign ($), hyphen (-), and underscore (_), or any combination. 3. Set up at least one layout viewport. To create a new layout from an existing file 1. Do one of the following: Choose Insert > Layout > Layout from Template. On the Layouts toolbar, click the Layout from Template tool ( Type layout, press Enter, and choose Template. ).
2. Select the desired template, drawing, or drawing interchange file that contains the layout you want, and then click Open. 3. Select the layout(s), and then click OK. You can choose multiple layouts by holding down CTRL while selecting layout names.
progeCAD Architecture
183
To make a copy of a layout 1. Type layout and then press Enter. 2. In the prompt box, choose Copy. 3. Type the name of the layout you want to copy, and then press Enter. 4. Type a name for the new layout, and then press Enter. To save a layout as a drawing template 1. Type layout and then press Enter. 2. In the prompt box, choose Save. 3. Type the name of the layout that you want to save, and then press Enter. 4. Specify the file name and location for the template, and then click Save. After you save a layout as a template, you can use the template when you create new drawings. You can also import the templates layouts into another drawing.
184
4M
On a Layout tab, you must create at least one layout viewport to see your model. However, you can create multiple layout viewports that display unique views of your model located in model space. Each layout viewport functions as a window into your model space drawing. You can separately control the view, scale, and contents of each layout viewport. Each layout viewport is created as a separate entity that you can move, copy, or delete. Click any layout viewport to make it the current viewport, and then add or modify model space entities in that viewport. Any changes you make in one layout viewport are immediately visible in the other viewports (if the other layout viewports are displaying that portion of the drawing). Zooming or panning in the current viewport affects only that viewport. This section focusses on working with layout viewports in paper space on a Layout tab.
2. In the prompt box, choose Fit To View, Create 2 Viewports, Create 3 Viewports, or Create 4 Viewports, or specify two opposing corners to create a custom viewport. 3. In the prompt box, choose the viewport orientation. 4. Do one of the following: To arrange the viewports to fill the current graphic area, in the prompt box, choose Fit To Screen. To fit the viewports within a bounding rectangle, specify the corners of a rectangle.
TIP: When you create a layout viewport, the layout viewport border is created on the current layer. You can make layout viewport borders invisible by creating a new layer before you create layout viewports and then turning off that layer after you create the layout viewports. To select a layout viewports borders, you must turn that layer back on before you can rearrange or modify the layout viewport.
progeCAD Architecture
185
You can create a single layout viewport, or you can divide the graphic area into two viewports arrangedvertically (A) or horizontally (B); three viewports arranged left (C), right (D), above (E),below (F), vertically (G), or horizontally (H); or four viewports (I).
3. Choose On or Off. 4. Select the edge of the layout viewport to turn on or off, and then press Enter. To change the scale of model space entities relative to paper space 1. Click the Model tab. 2. Click a viewport to make it current. 3. Choose View > Zoom > Zoom. 4. Type the zoom scale factor relative to paper space by appending the suffix xp to the scale factor, and then press Enter. For example, to increase the scale of the entities in the viewport on the Model tab to twice the size of paper space units, type 2xp. To decrease the scale to half the size of paper space units, type .5xp.
186
4M
2. Select the paper size and paper orientation, and then click OK.
progeCAD Architecture
187
2. From the Printer Name list, select a printer or plotter, and then click OK.
3. Click the Scale/View tab. 4. To scale the drawing to fit on one printed page, select the check box under Print Scale. 5. Select Save Changes to Layout, and then click Apply to save your changes. To specify the scale factor yourself 1. If necessary, click the desired Layout tab or the Model tab. 2. Do one of the following: Choose File > Print. Type print and then press Enter.
188
4M
3. Click the Scale/View tab. 4. In Print Scale, do one of the following: Select a pre-defined scale. For example, choose 1:2 if you want 1 printed unit (inch or millimeter) to equal 2 drawing units. Select Custom, and then under User Defined Scale, type the ratio of printed units of measure (inches or millimeters) to drawing units.
5. To specify the printed units of measure, click Inches or Millimeters. 6. Select Save Changes to Layout, and then click Apply to save your changes. To specify a portion of the drawing to print 1. If necessary, click the desired Layout tab or the Model tab. 2. Do one of the following: Choose File > Print. Type print and then press Enter.
3. Click the Scale/View tab. 4. Under Print Area, click one of the following: Current View prints the view on the screen. Saved View prints the selected saved view. Extents prints the area that contains entities in the drawing. Limits prints to the limits defined for the layout or drawing. Window prints the portion of the drawing contained in the specified window, maintaining the aspect ratio of the windowed area to the drawing. If you clicked Window, you must specify the window. Under Windowed Print Area, enter the diagonal x- and y-coordinates of the window, or select the area on the screen. To print only the area in the window without considering whether there is extra space on the screen, select the Print Only Area Within Specified Window check box. 5. Under Entities To Print, click one of the following: All Entities Within Print Area prints all drawing entities contained within the specified print area. Selected Entities Within Print Area prints only the entities you select from within the specified print area.
6. Select Save Changes to Layout, and then click Apply to save your changes.
progeCAD Architecture
189
A. Displays either Model or the layout name to which the print settings apply. B. Click to select the area of the drawing that you want to print. C. Type the x- and y-coordinates of the two opposing corners of the rectangular area of the drawing that you want to print; or, to specify coordinates in the drawing window, click Select Print Area. D. Select to print the area of the window while ignoring the aspect ratio to the remainder of the drawing. E. Select to activate command hide as you printing. F. Click to specify drawing units and paper size in millimeters or inches. G. Specify the scale for the print area by typing the ratio of drawing units to printed inches or printed millimeters. H. Select to fit the specified print area to the current paper size. I. Click to print selected entities within the specified print area. J. Click to print all entities within the specified print area. K. Select to save the print settings for the model or layout. L. Select to load print settings from the current layout (or model) or the last time you printed.
To specify the print area origin 1. If necessary, click the desired Layout tab or the Model tab. 2. Do one of the following: Choose File > Print. Type print and then press Enter.
3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Under Origin Of Print Area, do one of the following:
190
4M
To center the specified print area on the printed page, select the Center On Page check box. To specify an origin for the print area, type the x- and y-coordinates, or click Select Origin and then specify a point on the drawing.
5. Select Save Changes to Layout, and then click Apply to save your changes.
3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Choose how you want to print lineweights: Print Lineweights prints entities with their assigned lineweights. If not selected, entities print with a default outline. Scale Lineweights prints lineweights in proportion to the scale you set on the Scale/View tab. If not selected, lineweights print at their assigned size without adjustments for the print scale. (A Layout tab must be active to scale lineweights.)
5. Select Save Changes to Layout, and then click Apply to save your changes.
progeCAD Architecture
191
A. Displays either Model or the layout name to which the print settings apply. B. Select a print style table. C. Click to load print settings from a PCP file. D. Click to save the current configuration as a PCP file. E. Select to print the drawing upside down on your printer. F. Select to print entities with their assigned lineweights. G. Select to print lineweights in proportion to the scale you set on the Scale/View tab. (A Layout tab must be active.) H. Click to specify the print area origin by selecting a point within the drawing. I. Type x- and y-coordinates to specify the origin of the print area. J. Select to center the print area on the page. K. Click to make changes to the selected print style table. L. Click to create a new print style table. M. Select to save the print settings for the model or layout. N. Select to load print settings from the current layout (or model) or the last time you printed.
clients who have their own printing preferences. You can save print styles in a named file for each of your clients. You can even share the file with co-workers, or store the files on a network to ensure that everyone in your office uses the same standards.
3. Click the Advanced tab. 4. Under Print Style Table (Pen Assignments), select a print style table that you created or one of the following: None Applies no print style table. Entities print according to their own properties. Icad Uses the default print style table and its color assignments. Monochrome Prints all colors as black.
5. At the prompt, choose Yes to assign the print style table to all layouts in the drawing, including the Model tab, or choose No to assign the print style table only to the individual layout listed in Layout Name on the Print dialog box. 6. Select Save Changes to Layout, and then click Apply to save your changes.
2. Double-click Create a Print Style Table. 3. Complete the setup wizard. progeCAD Architecture 193
On the last wizard page, you can click Print Style Table Editor to set up the print styles for the table. For more details about the Print Style Table Editor options, see the next section.
2. Double-click the print style table you want to modify. 3. Click the General tab, and then do any of the following: Enter a new table description. Select Apply Global Scale Factor to Non-ISO Linetypes to apply the scale factor to non-ISO linetypes used for any print style in the current print style table. This also applies to fill patterns, which are not used in progeCAD, but are recognized for compatibility with AutoCAD. Enter a scale factor to apply to non-ISO linetypes used for any print style in the current print style table.
4. Click the Properties tab, and then do any of the following: Make format changes to a print style by selecting it in the Print Styles list, then make color, pen map, linetype, or lineweight changes for the print style. Your changes are saved automatically for the selected print style. Add a new print style by clicking Add Style. Enter a new name, and then click OK. Select the options for the print style. (Available for named print styles only.) Rename a print style by selecting it in the Print Styles list. Single-click the print style again, and then enter a new name. (Available for named print styles only.) Delete a print style by selecting it in the Print Styles list. Click Delete Style. (Available for named print styles only.)
194
4M
5. Click OK.
A. Select a print style to modify it. B. Enter a description for the selected print style. C. Click to create a new print style. (Named print style tables only.) D. Click to delete the selected print style. (Named print style tables only.) E. Click to modify the list of available lineweights for the current print style table. F. Click to save the print style table with a new name or in a new location. G. Choose a lineweight for the selected print style. H. Choose a linetype for the selected print style. I. Type or scroll to the width of the virtual pen for the selected print style (for printers that dont have physical pens, such as laser or inkjet printers). J. Type or scroll to the width of the physical pen for the selected print style. K. Choose a color for the selected print style.
progeCAD Architecture
195
To preview a drawing before printing 1. If necessary, click the desired Layout tab or the Model tab. 2. Do one of the following: Choose File > Print Preview. On the Standard toolbar, click the Print Preview tool ( Type ppreview and then press Enter. ).
3. After checking the preview image, do one of the following: To print the drawing, click Print Settings to display the Print dialog box. To return to the drawing, click Close.
A. Click to zoom in. B. Click to zoom out. If you have zoomed in several times, click multiple times to restore the entire preview image. C. Click to display the Print Settings dialog box. D. Click to print the drawing. E. Click to close the preview and return to the drawing.
196
4M
Printing a drawing
The Print dialog box is organized by tabs into three functional areas: scaling and viewing; color and width mapping; and advanced printing options. The print setting options available under each tab were described in the previous sections. NOTE: You cannot print a rendered image directly to a printer. To print a rendered image, you must first export the drawing to a different format -either a bitmap (.bmp), Postscript (.ps), or TIFF (.tif) file -and then print it from another graphics program. To print a drawing 1. If necessary, click the desired Layout tab or the Model tab. 2. Do one of the following: Choose File > Print. On the Standard toolbar, click the Print tool ( ). If you click the Print tool, the Print dialog box does not display. Your drawing will be sent directly to the selected printer. Type print and then press Enter.
3. From the Print dialog box, make any adjustments to the settings. 4. Click Print. NOTE: Instead of using the print settings you saved with your layout, you can select Previous Plot in the Use Settings list to print according to the settings used the last time you printed. If necessary, you can click Reset to restore the ProgeCAD Architecture default print settings.
progeCAD Architecture
197
198
4M
3. AutoREG-Topographical
This chapter describes the operation concept, as well as the commands of the 3D Topographical Component of ProgeCAD Architecture. All these commands are included within the AutoREG group of commands.
Using these commands, the user can easily draw any topographical diagram and then edit it and print it. The fact that the AutoREG commands are described below in the order they appear in the menu, does not necessarily mean that they must be used in this order.
progeCAD Architecture
199
3.3 Grid
The Grid option enables the user to specify a building grid, which provides additional assistance when drawing architectural ground plans. The use of this command is not obligatory. However, it is extremely useful, especially in cases that you deal with side-lines of a building plot or a building. The option includes two secondary options, Place and Modify, which can be respectively used to specify the grid initially and any possible future changes. By selecting Place grid, the above window appears, in which you can specify the grid. More specifically, in this window, you must specify: The angle of the grid with respect to the x-axis (e.g. 0 degrees) The angle of its horizontal (or side) lines
200
4M
The distances of all the grid lines, Horizontal and Side. For this purpose, specify the line type in the top part (e.g. Horizontal), then, specify the value of the distance in the corresponding box and then press Add, in which case you observe that the distance has been moved to the list on the left. Using the same method, keep adding distances (or modifying-deleting existing ones using the corresponding buttons), in order to enter all the desired distances. As soon as you specify one group of distances (horizontal or side), you should appropriately change the above setting (Horizontal or Side) and specify the rest of the distances. Data concerning the text that will accompany the grid (e.g. digits or letters, character height, distance of numbering, position etc)
If, for example, you specify Distances in the above Grid window, Side 1, 5, 9, 14 and Horizontal 2, 4, 8, 16 and keep unchanged the initially specified values of the rest of the parameters, then you can view the following grid being drawn.
progeCAD Architecture
201
Observe that all the relevant details (e.g. line numbering) have automatically been drawn. Any changes on the grid can be performed through the corresponding command Modify, where you can change any grid parameter and immediately view the result of the modification.
202
4M
Note: The value of the angles is in grades (grad) and their method of measurement is in accordance with the user selected method (the application prompts you to define whether it is a clockwise or a counter-clockwise method). It is also noted that the "0" angle coincides with the x-axis and that all the distances are in m, meaning that the scale of your drawing is 1:1 (1 drawing unit corresponds to 1m).
Import from a Tachymeter File: It is useful in the case that you have a file (in ascii format) containing the readings of the Tachymeter. The only required action is to specify that file and following, specify the start and the length of the data point serial number, x co-ordinate and y co-ordinate, assuming that these are located in the columns of a text file, each row of which corresponds to the data of one point. As soon as you specify the above, you can view the points being automatically inserted in your drawing. Example: You have the co-ordinates of 5 points from the tachymeter, placed in a text (ascii) file using the following rows (for extra help, the 1st, 2nd etc columns appear on top): 1st 1 2 3 4 5 2nd 3rd 1 2 2 2 3 4th 0 0 5 8 0 5th 6th 5 8 1 1 2 0 1 0 7th 8th 9th 10th
As it is illustrated in the example, only the serial numbers (s/n) of the points are contained in the first column, the x co-ordinates in the 3rd-4th column and the y coordinates in the 6th-7th column. That is, the co-ordinates of the first point are (10,5), of the second point (20,8) etc. With the above tachymeter file, and by selecting Import from Tachymeter File in the application, provide the following responses to the prompts of the application: Start of Record of point number: Type 1 (indicating the 1st column, which the serial numbers of the points occupy) Length of Record of point number: Specify 1 (the s/n occupy the 1st column). Start of Record of x co-ordinates: Specify 3 as the start of records (the x coordinates start from the 3rd column). 203
progeCAD Architecture
Length of Record of x co-ordinates: Specify 2 as the length (the x co-ordinates occupy the 3rd and the 4th columns). Start of Record of y co-ordinates: Specify 6 as the start of records (the y coordinates start from the 6th column). Length of Record of y co-ordinates: Specify 2 as the length (the y co-ordinates occupy the 6th and the 7th columns).
Running Shade, you can shade the image and view the generated three-dimensional building plot. Contour Lines: You are prompted to select the 3D building plot that you have specified, where you want to specify the contour lines. Next, you are prompted to specify the Hypsometric difference of the <1.00> sections (interval), that is the height difference between the curves that will be drawn (default value 1.00 m). Finally, you are prompted to specify the radius of curvature <0.00>. At this point, you can specify if you want, the radius of curvature of the hypsometric lines, so that they appear smoother. An example of representing contour lines in a ground plan (2D) and three-dimensional view (3D) of the building plot previously specified, appears in the following two screenshots:
204
4M
Notes: It is obvious that, the greater the number of the triangles you use to represent the morphology of the building plot is, the greater the obtained drawing accuracy of the contour lines will be. The contour lines lie in a block. If you explode the block, you can edit each line.
progeCAD Architecture
205
Excavation: Using this option, you are requested to initially select the 3D Building Plot. Next, the dialog box Select Excavation Outline appears. Select the previously drawn polyline, defining the outline of the excavation. Finally the application prompts you to specify the Altitude of the building plot (the lowest and the highest points of the building plot appear inside the parenthesis, e.g. 0-3), using the excavation outline. This way, you can specify the starting depth of the excavation. An example of such an excavation for the previously specified Building Plot appears in the following screenshots (hidelines and shade are activated).
Note: In a similar way, the application can calculate the volume of rubble filling (earth fills). When you are prompted to specify the altitude of the building plot, specify the altitude of the final level of the earth fill. If the value of the altitude lies between the lowest and the highest point of the building plot, the volume of excavation, the volume of earth fill and the difference will be calculated. A positive value of difference represents the volume of excavation, while a negative value represents the volume of earth fill.
206
4M
Ideal Solid Body: Using this command, you can create the ideal solid body. The definition of the ideal solid body presupposes that the plot has been specified as a 3D building plot and that the building line has been placed within the building plot, using the corresponding command of AutoREG. Street: Using this command, you can easily construct the adjacent streets of the building plot, which are useful in creating the ideal solid body.
progeCAD Architecture
207
Having defined all the triangles that constitute the building plot and by pressing the right mouse button, you can view the total area of the building plot being printed right below the individual areas, as a sum of the above separate triangles. The user can easily realise the way this command functions with a simple test. b) Rect. Co-ordinates: In the alternative case of calculating the area using rectangular co-ordinates, the total area of the building plot is calculated and printed in a table, along with the table of the rectangular co-ordinates.
208
4M
progeCAD Architecture
209
3.15 Diagonal
Using this command, you can easily draw a diagonal of the building site or any distance in general. You are initially prompted to specify the two ends of the distance (you can use the familiar snap tools of progeCAD). After specifying the second end, you can view the diagonal being drawn using a dotted line and the value of the distance appears approximately in the middle of the line.
3.16 Altitude
The Altitude command is used to insert the altitudes of each point of the building site in a small frame. There are two distinct secondary options: Building Plot Point: Using this command, you are prompted to Select a point of the Building Plot, that is, to select the point that you want to place at a specific altitude, with that altitude printed. To the prompt Altitude, specify the new altitude of the point. Point: This command is similar to the previous one, used to print an altitude level at any point, without the need to select a vertex of the Building Plot.
210
4M
progeCAD Architecture
211
212
4M
4. AutoBLD: General
As mentioned in Chapter 1, the option group AutoBLD includes the drawing commands of the Architectural application, or in other words the drawing tools that are necessary for the Architectural drawing, its editing as well as the creation of the project drawings.
As it is shown in the AutoBLD menu, the various options are divided into sub-groups which include project parameters, drawing commands of the building elements, library management instructions, viewing commands of the project drawings and many other commands. Most of these commands can also be selected through ProgeCAD Architecture toolbars and icons.
progeCAD Architecture
213
The options listed in the first section are described one by one in the following sections of Chapter 4, starting from the "Building Definition" option.
In this screen you can specify the floors of the project building by defining the heightlevel for each Level (floor). More specifically: In the "Level" field, define the floor number. In the "Elevation" field, define the height of the floor level. The user may define manually a benchmark for level measurement (e.g. the pavement). You may also define negative levels (e.g. -3 m). In the "File" field, define the path and the name of the relevant DWG drawing-file, only if you refer to an already existing drawing (which means that you do not intend to draw the ground plan from the beginning). If there is no DWG architectural drawing available, you may leave the filename blank. In case there is no DWG file but a DXF file instead (if the ground plans are created by applications other than progeCAD), you will have to convert them first into DWG files, running the command DXFIN of progeCAD, and then insert the DWG files using the aforementioned option. You can insert and manage the ground plans with the use of the progeCAD xref command. Note that the files are correctly inserted when you can "Open" them with progeCAD (e.g. no missing fonts or menus). At the bottom of the dialog box you can see three available functions, which are actually used for managing the floor files. More specifically: Press the New button to save a new building floor or the changes in the data of a floor.
214
4M
Use the "Current" option to select the ground plan/file you want to work on each time. Select the "Delete" option to delete the selected floor (by clicking on it). The command "Erase" removes the ground plan of the relevant floor from the project. Note that the various ground plans should have a common reference point.
The user may disable whichever element group he/she wants to by simply clicking the indicator-box of the relative group. When the box is checked, the relative group is enabled. As shown in the screen, the layers that can be modified by the user (disabled or enabled) are those of the basic elements (Walls, Columns, Beams etc), the special structure elements (staircases, handrails etc), other auxiliary elements (Dimensions, hatch) and other informations. Furthermore, the "Plan View" & "3D View" indications, which cannot appear at the same time at the bottom left part of the screen, assist the user to manage the layers in either the ground plan or the 3D view, displaying at the same time the appropriate indication at the bottom. With a simple test the user may easily understand the utility of this command.
progeCAD Architecture
215
Note: In fact, the above option enables the user to avoid the progeCAD "Set Layer" command, which can also be used though it has proved to be very unhandy because of the large number of layers (in conjunction with the floors).
216
4M
If you select (by left clicking) a typical element (existing or blank) so as to highlight it in the list and then click the button Library, a list of structural elements from the program libraries will appear (if it overlaps the previous list you can move it just like any other dialog window) from where you can select the desired element. In order to do this, left click to select and then click OK at the bottom. The afore-mentioned instructions apply to every type of structural element, that is to say for the inner walls, the openings, the floors and the ceilings. Regarding the walls, the floors and the ceilings in particular, except the characteristic average thermal conductivity coefficients k, you can specify the accurate thermal conductivity coefficients as well, by assigning a specific heat-insulating sheet to those walls. Note: The double characterisation regarding the k of a wall is the key for the simultaneous elaboration of a heating air-conditioning system (link to the E/M FINEHVAC package).
This option enables the user to select the printing height (based on the printing scale of the Architectural Drawing, predefined in the "Plus" menu) and the parameters font as shown in the following dialog box:
progeCAD Architecture
217
Outer wall: Use this option to select the type of the current wall, by pressing the button "Type". Depending on the selected wall type, the relevant features appear in the window (Coefficient k, wall colour, weight and type by Ashrae). Furthermore, in the same window, the user may specify the current value for the height and the thickness of the wall, the colours of the wall on the screen (for 3D or 2D), the height of the beam suspension as well as the existence of insulation in the wall. The user can define the wall type (Linear or Acr) as well as whether he wishes the unions of walls to be cleaned or not. More specifically, the options for the wall parameters are described below:
3D Color: The option "Color 3D" is double because it refers to both sides of the wall (inner and outer), as it is necessary to associate different materials to both sides in photorealism (in the case of PhotoIDEA). More specifically, by selecting "Color 3D" the following window appears:
218
4M
The user can select colour and material at the same time since each colour is associated automatically with a specific material (the order of the materials in the above screen is indicative). Note that the selected colour will be used in shading or photorealism (through the "render" command), while the material will be used in photorealism through PhotoIDEA. Of course, photorealism with PhotoIDEA is by far superior, since materials have texture as well. After you have associated walls with materials in "Wall Parameters from the beginning, you can create the conditions for the almost automatic construction of photorealistic images through PhotoIDEA, provided of course that it is included in your package. Finally, note that, as in the case of walls, you can define as well the materials for all the other elements (e.g. window casings, rails, handrails) in an entirely similar way, something that you will have to repeat many times. Color 2D: The option Color 2D" enables the user to select the desired colour of the walls in the ground plan. The default colour is set to magenta (which corresponds to a 0.6 pen in the default colours of progeCAD). The user can select a different colour from the relevant colour palette which appears:
Insulation: The option "Insulation", which is disabled by default, provides the possibility to make the insulation visible on the specific wall. If you check the relevant box (with the mouse), you can select the button "Insulation", and the following window will appear:
In this window you can define (in m) the exact insulation thickness (e.g. 0,05 m) as well as the distance from its outer side (e.g. 0,10 m). As a result, a double line with the above geometric parameters will appear within the wall. In case that you want the insulation drawing displayed within this double line, you only have to enable the "Drawing" frame and "Select" among the various drawing types appearing in slides.
progeCAD Architecture
219
Note: Because of the fact that the insulation in the wall "impedes" the drawing in
a way, it can also be defined afterwards through the command "Modify Wall" (one or many).
Beam: The "Beam Suspension" serves the collaboration with STRAD, the structural analysis program of 4M Suit. This way you can define the beam type, exactly as for the wall, as well as the suspension height (in m), elevation (in m), width (in m) and color.
Fixed Side: The user can define the side of the wall where the beam will be positioned. This side could be the fixed side of wall (the side wich the wall was drawn) and the no fixed side (the side wich the wall grew during the drawing). Connection with Roof: Enabling the Connection with Roof dialog box, the user can connect a wall with the roof, so that the wall is not necessarily rectangular but so shaped that is limited on the upper side by the roof (e.g. in the case of a two-sided roof where the side walls generate a triangular space along with the roof). Pressing Roof < in this dialog box, a message in the command line prompts the user to select roof; then, the wall properties window appears, where pressing OK leads to the desired effect. Scotias: The user can define scotias on the wall as follows: First, by choosing the positioning of the scotia on the upper side of the dialog box. The alternative options are a) fixed side (of the wall) only, b) no fixed side, two sides equal, two sides different.
220
4M
Then, by defining the elevation, height and depth of each scotia from the menu. By filling in a set of values on the lower side and by pressing the Add button, these values are trasfered to the Fixed Side (or any other above selected case) of the wall.
Hide Horizontal Lines: This option is also enabled by the AutoBLD>Project Drawings>Hide lines between walls-slabs" command as the user can hide the intermediate line that appears during the generation of side views and cross sections and contributes to a non-uniform result. Then, by double-clicking on the desired wall, you can see that the Hide Horizontal Lines dialog box is active; therefore, if you press Define, the relative window appears. Thus, you can see the properties of the points of the wall sides. Pressing Display opens the drawing where the line you chose to hide appears dotted. If the line is incorrectly specified, you can delete it by selecting "Delete". Moreover, you can add or modify a line. In this case, you are prompted, via relative messages in the command line, to specify the 1st point and, then, the 2nd point so that the line properties are inserted in the relative window.
Inner wall: All the above apply here too, plus an additional option in which the user
may define the wall type, whether it is "inner" (which means it is adjacent to a heated space) or "inner to a non-heated space". This information is quite useful in case there is a link to FINE-HVAC, the Heating-Cooling Program.
Window: You can specify the window type and its features will be automatically defined according to k, the glass coefficient and the frame type. Furthermore, you can define the window geometric parameters (height, rize, etc) as well as its exact morphology. In particular, the appearing dialog screen is the following:
progeCAD Architecture
221
This dialog includes two options: 3D Drawing: Enables you to choose the type of the window. As far as this type is concerned, there are two alternative ways of defining windows, which practically cover every need. Parametrical Window: In order to define a window in this way you need simply to select the option Selection and select a window drawing (as a result, the following screen appears):
222
4M
Through this screen, you can choose a window type and then click OK in order to locate it at the previous dialog. Before any selection you can see the different types of windows on the left or by using the keys Next and Previous, the PgUp/PgDn keys and so on. In addition you can sort our windows according to the categories that are defined, in order to speed up the selection procedure. Finally, you can see all types of windows either on their 3D or 2D form, by selecting accordingly the representation mode up on the dialog. For example, if you select the 2D representation, the following screen will appear.
Parametrical Window of the user: This option enablesyou to select a window type that has been drawn freely from the user. That drawing from scratch procedure is described in a subsequent paragraph, in the instruction Open>Library along with a comprehensive example.
The Slide Type radio button enables you to view either the slides or the photorealistic images of the windows. Finally, through the key Characteristics the following dialog appears:
progeCAD Architecture
223
Within this dialog you can define the properties of the casing (if there exist or not, width, thickness, 3D colour etc), the frame properties (width, thickness, 3D colour), the openness percentage (how much the opening is open) concerning both, 2D and 3D representations. You can also define the glass properties (thickness and colour) and the properties of the cubits (width, thickness and colour 3D). In addition, you have the two options Reset from local block and Reset from general library. The first option enables you to give to a certain opening the default properties from the library. For example, if you have changed the properties of an opening within a project drawing you can recall anytime the default properties from the library. In general, any changes implemented on the openings from the menu AutoBLD>Opening>Library are updating the user opening library. However the openings of a current project drawing are not affected in any way, which means that they keep their own local definitions. If you want to update from the user library an opening that has been already located within your drawing, then you have to select Reset from general library. Finally, through the selection frames you can see the number of frames which constitute the specific window. You can either select a certain material, or modify the material of a specific frame during defining the way of opening. The option Colours of a library opening, which is located at the lower part of the window is activated in case that the type of one of the opening frames has been defined as from the library. Within chapter 5 you can find detailed instructions regarding these frames, defining the way of opening firstly and the window secondly. The user can easily understand all these functions through a few simple examples. Note: The option Material is activated if the type of the selected frame is fulfilled. Apart from the options described above, the initial window dialog includes the following options, as well: Justification: It justifies the casing relatively to the one or the other side of the wall, practically by entering the appropriate distance (zero or greater) with respect to the side of the wall (1st or 2nd). In case you select center the casing is centered cross the wall (along its thickness). The frame justification justifies the frames relatively to the one or the other side of the casing, through the appropriate distance (zero or greater). If you select center, the frames will be centered with respect to the width of the casing. Include in the lighting/ventilation control: You define whether you want to include this window in the lighting/ventilation calculations and control, or not. Shutters: This option is used in order to define whether there are shutters on the windows or not. In particular, you have the following options: No Shutters Parametrical shutter: Through this selection you can choose one of the shutter types included in the application. You just have to click select and the following screen appears:
224
4M
Here you can select any type and bring it at the previous screen by clicking "". Before any selection, you can go to the next or previous page in the shutter library, using the keys Previous and Next. In addition you can sort the types according to the categories that you have defined, in order to speed up the selection procedure. Finally, you can see the shutters, either on their 3D or 2D representation, by selecting respectively the mode of representation on the upper side of the dialog. If you select 2D representation, the following dialog will appear:
progeCAD Architecture
225
Users parametric shutter: This option is used for selecting a certain type of shutter among those that have been freely defined by the user. The procedure for defining the shutters is described below (see instruction Opening>Library along with a comprehensive example.
Through the Shutters option you can define if you prefer to view the shutters as slides or as photorealistic images. Finally, the key Properties leads to the following dialog.
Through this dialog you can define the thickness and colour of the frame, the location and the leader (rail) of the sliding opening (it is activated in case of a sliding shutter), the alignment and the distance of the frames from the side of the casing, the openning percentages concerning both, 3D and 2D representations. Also the shutter material and the way of opening of the 2nd and 3rd panel of the shutter (in case there are more than 2 panels). Finally, the option Modify opening side is used to define the direction of the opening side in case you want to change the default value. The selections Reset from local Block and Reset from General Library are used to modify the properties on the shutters that you have introduced in the drawings, as already mentioned above in the window properties. Window-Sill: Through this option you can define whether you will have a window-sill or not. In the first case, the fields thickness, projection 1, projection 2 and colour 3D are activated, ready to get the desirable values by the user. Cornice: Check the relevant box and click the button Cornice to place a frame around the opening with the parameters appearing in the adjacent dialog box, which appears. In this dialog you define the side where the cornice is going to be located (1st, 2nd or double), as well as the width, the thickness and the colour of the cornice.
226
4M
Label: The indication Label is also found at the bottom, on the right. Click this button and the adjacent dialog box will appear. Click the button Type and the label type group (in slides) will appear, from which you can select the one that you desire. Furthermore, at the bottom you can add the value for the Scale as well as the relevant words for the construction material. When the scale is 1, the label is adjusted to the usual size of the previous version (for 1:50). Down on the left, there are two more options Turn X and Turn Y respectively, which can be used for the rotation of the window on the plan view. Also, the selection Draw 2D which is used for declaring whether you want the window to be drawn on the plan view or not.
Door:
You can define the type, the height and the length of the door as well as a series of additional items for which apply what is mentioned above for the windows.
The selection of the door drawing is defined through the program libraries (parametrical or user parametrical), after clicking Selection, exactly as you did for the windows, as well. The screen that appears is the following:
progeCAD Architecture
227
Respectively, for the ground plan drawings the first screen is:
As far as the other features are concerned, apply the afore-mentioned for the windows.
228
4M
Opening: Everything mentioned above, regarding the windows, applies in this case as well. Note that the options Properties and Shutters are disabled for Openings.
Floor: The "Floor" features concern, first of all, the type which can be selected from "Typical Elements" with the use of the "Type" button-command (consequently you can see the coefficient k, the colour and the weight, which are features used when link to FINEHVAC program is established. You can also select one of the three floor types, "Towards Soil", "Towards Non-Heated Space" and "Towards Heated Space". This information can also be used for link to FINEHVAC.
Ceiling:
Similar to "Floor", the "Ceiling Parameters" concern first its type, which is selected from the "Typical Elements" with the use of the "Type" command-button, while you can at the same time select one of the four types "Towards External Environment", "Towards Non-Heated Space", "Towards Pilotis" and "Towards Heated Space".
progeCAD Architecture
229
Dimensioning:
This command leads to the dialog box with the dimensioning parameters, where the user can define the desired dimensioning parameters. More specifically, the user can modify the appearance of the distances between the text and the dimensional lines, the text position, the height, the arrows, the colours of dimensions and lines etc. Furthermore, the Modify Dimensioning command enables the user to modify the features of an existing dimension in the drawing a posteriori. Finally, with the "User Arrow" option, 2 new dimension endpoints are available: 4mt1.dwg and 4mt2.dwg.
Viewing: The "Viewing" option enables the user to specify the "angle" from which he prefers to view the 3D image. In other words, the "3D View" command at the bottom of the ProgeCAD Architecture option group, respects the specified viewing features. In order to specify the viewing angles, simply define the two angles displayed on the screen:
230
4M
You can specify these angles in the above window either by typing the corresponding values or by "moving" the mouse directly on the graphical readings and right clicking the desired point. It is made clear that the viewing angle from the axis is the viewing direction of the user in relation to the horizontal level and from the axis in relation to the vertical level. Moreover, you can enable (with check) in the same window the Hide Lines option, so as to hide automatically the lines in the Project Drawings (views, sections, perspectives etc). Note: When Hide Lines is enabled, the appearance of the project drawings on the screen is naturally delayed. Thus it is better not to enable the Hide Lines in the above window, but hide the lines at will, by typing the command "Hide" of progeCAD in the command line.
If you select this option a dialog box will appear where you can enable (with check) the fields "version" and "floor" respectively, in order to see at the bottom (status bar) the version of the current program as well as the floor in which you are working (current floor).
Miscalleaneous: If you select Miscellaneous a dialog box with the following two
options will appear: Display dialog box before drawing: When you enable this option (by checking the box), before drawing an element, a dialog box appears with its Parameters. For example, whenever you want to draw a wall the Wall Parameters dialog box appears, in order to select the desired features and then continue to draw the wall by clicking OK. Depending on your convenience, you can make your selection in this window. Length of seagments (circular section): It is the default value concerning the length of a circular section according to what is mentioned in the drawing of a circular wall.
progeCAD Architecture
231
This command is activated by pressing the Building Exploration icon ( ) in the Drawings toolbar; thus, the adjacent window appears on the screen. The options included in this window are: Side Views, Axonometric Projections, Perspective Projections, Cross Sections and Plan Views. All the user-created drawings are listed in this window, after the name defined by the user during creation. Thus, switching between the various building drawings is quite simple. It is important to mention that each time the user selects one of these drawings, any changes applied on the plan view are displayed on the selected drawing.
232
4M
5.1 Wall
If you want to draw or edit walls (or wall outlines) select the option "Wall", which can be found in the second subgroup of the AutoBLD option group. This option includes the sub-options "Outer", "Inner", "Outer wall from polyline", "Inner wall from polyline" and Outline as well as the sub-options "Modify", "Delete", "Extend", "Break", "Join", "Trim" and "Move". The first group deals with the wall drawing, while the second with their further processing after having been drawn. Finally there is also the option "Elevation of Merge Intersection", which affects the drawing structure as you will see hereunder. In the following sections each group is described analytically. Note: After enabling the option "Show Dialog Box before Drawing", which can be found in the "Parameters -> Miscellaneous", each time you select the wall drawing option, the "wall parameters" window appears automatically. Alternatively, you can (with the above option disabled) first enter the "Wall Parameters" and then the "Wall Drawing" either in the normal menu or, much easier, in the command menu which is on the right side of the screen. However, it depends on the user's preference to enable or disable the above option, since in the various architectural programs both alternatives are possible.
progeCAD Architecture
233
iii) the direction towards which the wall will grow, by entering any point on one of the two half-planes defined by the wall line (the application message in the command prompt is "Enter Side Point").
After the above described actions, you can see that the wall has been drawn and that you can continue to draw another wall starting from the ending point you defined earlier, unless you right click, which means that you want to stop. You can change the wall drawing from linear into circular, by typing T, in the following program prompts, and pressing Enter. As you can see while you are drawing, the feature of consecutive wall drawing is very convenient because it requires fewer moves. As mentioned earlier, in the Element Parameters section, the thickness of the wall, its height and its level in relation to the floor level (when the level is 0, the wall starts from the floor), will have the values stored in the Element Parameters for the wall. You can deal with all possible cases of walls with different heights by entering the proper values for the wall height and level. In the following sections, the techniques for constructing walls and all the relevant features of the application are described in detail: a) Simple Wall: After you have defined the first point of a wall and as you are moving to define the second point, in the coordinates system, you can see the length of the wall being drawn as well as the angle towards which it is drawn. The user can provide a number for the size of the wall he/she draws, either in Cartesian or polar coordinates, in the same way as in progeCAD. For example, if you want to draw a horizontal wall that is 2 meters long, in the command prompt: Wall end/Relative to Wall \ Toggle shape <Linear> type: @2<0 and you can see that the wall shown on the right is drawn.
234
4M
Nevertheless, if you know the point where the end of the wall lies with respect to the initial point (relative distances x and y), you can type: @2,3 which means that the distance between the first and the second point is 2m along the x-axis and 3m along the y-axis. In this last case, the wall that is drawn is the one shown on the right. b) Connect to another wall: If you want to connect a wall to another wall, you can use the special snap features ("osnap") provided by progeCAD. In this way, you can activate osnap by pressing the middle button of a 3-button mouse (or by holding the key <Shift> down and right click with a 2-button mouse) and select either the end or the middle of a wall or bring the wall in a position vertical to another one or provide the nearest point etc. For example, if you activate the Wall command, define the first starting point of the wall so that it falls exactly upon the bottom right endpoint of the previous one (using osnap "ENDPOINT") and provide the growing side. Then, you can see the two connected walls, as shown in the adjacent example. Moreover, you can join two walls by grabbing the grips of the first wall and moving it onto the point you want on the second wall. Thus, you can move, expand etc walls using only their grips as if they were simple lines. As you can see, when the "Cleanup Join" option of the External Wall tab is checked the program can automatically erase the wall joint. Furthermore, it should be pointed out that the program performs the joint even if you do not grab a point using the snap points ("osnap") but one of the points (starting or ending) simply lies within another wall. c) Create a wall in a position relative to another wall: With this option you can view the distance from the end of the wall with which another wall will be connected. More specifically, if you select the Wall option and press R (for "relative"), you will be prompted to move the mouse and select an existing wall (either from the inner or the outer side and towards the left or the right side). As soon as this happens, the graphics cursor automatically acquires the direction of the wall and the coordinates on the top of the screen indicate the distance from the end of the previously selected wall. Moreover, the 0 point (that is, the point where the value for distance is zero) is exactly the end of the wall that is lying towards the side you selected the wall. In this way, the newly created wall can have the exact relative distance you want with respect to the other one, with no effort at all. Apparently, this feature (viewing the desired relative distances on the screen during drawing) is extremely useful and in a similar way you can draw inner walls or openings on walls.
progeCAD Architecture
235
Outer Wall from Polyline: This option enables the user to specify more than one walls simultaneously or an outlined area (or outline). This command is much alike the option "Outline", which is described further down. The only difference is that, using this command, you just have to draw the room outline using a polyline. If you want to close the polyline, just type c (letter c) in the command line of AutoCAD or progeCAD (at the bottom of the screen), and you will see the polyline closing on the screen (that is, the last line is automatically drawn) and the only action left is to specify (with a single point) the side towards which you want the walls to grow. The program prompts you to delete the polyline used as a guide for the wall drawing. Inner Wall: This command is similar to the Outer Wall" option. While drawing an inner wall, the feature mentioned above for the outer wall is very helpful. Inner Wall from Polyline: This command is similar to the Outer Wall from Polyline option. Outline: This option enables the user to define more than one walls simultaneously or an outlined area (or outline). Begin by providing the starting and the ending point of each wall (consecutively) and then the side (outer or inner) towards which you want the walls to grow. If you want to close the outline, just type c (letter c) in the command line of progeCAD (at the bottom of the screen), and you will see the outline closing on the screen (that is, the last line is automatically drawn) and the only action left is to define (with a single point) the side towards which you want the walls to grow.
236
4M
4. After selecting the wall or the walls you want to delete, right click and select Erase. Modify: Using this command, you can view the parameters of existing walls or even modify them if you want to. As soon as you activate the command, you only need to move to the relevant wall. Then, a window with the wall parameters appears.
These parameters are exactly the same with the ones appearing in the Element Parameters window, mentioned in the previous chapter, with two additional lengths for the wall (the outer and the inner length). The user can modify any of the above parameters (e.g. insert insulation to a single wall, modify its height etc).
progeCAD Architecture
237
This command is also activated by selecting the desired wall (left click) and then right click and select Properties or even by double clicking on the desired wall. Enabling the Connection with Roof dialog box, the user can connect a wall with the roof, so that the wall is not necessarily rectangular but so shaped that is limited on the upper side by the roof (e.g. in the case of a two-sided roof where the side walls generate a triangular space along with the roof). Pressing Roof <, a message in the command line prompts the user to select roof; then, the wall properties window appears, where pressing "OK" leads to the desired effect. Multiple Change: This command is similar to the previous one, with the difference that you can make mass modifications to the walls, e.g. alter the height of all the walls on a certain level. If you select with the mouse 2 or more walls, the following dialog box appears, in which you should activate the field you want to modify (e.g. height) and insert the new value. Click "OK" for the corresponding updates to be performed:
This command is also activated by successively selecting via left clicking the desired walls and then by right clicking and selecting Properties. 3D Colors alternation: Run this command to alternate the materials on the sides of a wall, that is, the inner side becomes outer and vice-versa. The utility of this command is obvious in case of photorealism. Change Fixed Side: Use this option to change the fixed side of a wall. It is pointed out that the "Fixed Side" of a wall is the side from which the wall thickness is filled vertically. The material assigned to the fixed side is the one that will be applied to the wall side as well. Move: There are four ways available for moving a wall: 1. Using the grips that appear as soon as a wall is selected. To move a wall using the grips, you should first select the wall in order to make the grips appear and then click on a grip and drag it. The grip selected depends on the type of the wall you want to move. For example, to move a linear wall, you should select the grip that lies in the middle. To move a circular wall, you should select the grip that lies on its centre. 2. Selecting AutoBLD > Wall > Move executed the Move command mentioned also further down. 238 4M
3. Executing the Move command of AutoCAD or progeCAD. This command is executed by selecting the relevant icon ( ) from the toolbars or by selecting Modify -> Move from menu or by typing "move" in the command line and pressing Enter. The command prompts in cases 2 and 3 are: Select entities to move: Select the wall or the walls you want to move and then press Enter or right click. Vector (V) / <Base point (B)>: Specify a fixed point on the entities you want to move. Displacement point: Specify the point where you want to move the selected entities.
4. After selecting the wall or the walls you want to move, right click and select Move. The prompts appearing in the command line are the same as the ones mentioned in the previous case, starting from the second one. Stretch: There are four ways available for changing the size of a wall: 1. Using the wall grips. To stretch a wall using the grips, you should select the wall, for the grips to appear, and then click on a grip to activate it. This grip is equivalent to the base point which is also described further down. Then, you should move the grip to a new position. The grip selected depends on the exact item that you want to change. For example, to modify the angle of two walls that join, you should select the grip that lies on the angle. To stretch a wall, you should select one of the end grips. 2. Selecting AutoBLD > Wall > Stretch executes the Stretch command mentioned also further down. 3. Executing the Stretch command of AutoCAD or progeCAD. This command is executed by selecting the relevant icon ( ) from the toolbars or by selecting Modify -> Stretch from the menu or by typing "stretch" in the command line and pressing Enter. The command prompts in cases 2 and 3 are: Select entities to stretch by crossing window or crossing polygon: Select the wall or the walls which size you want to change and, after finishing, press Enter or right click. Base point of displacement: Select the base point with respect to which the size will be changed. Second point of displacement: Specify the displacement point where you want to select the base point in the previous step to be moved.
4. After selecting the wall or the walls to modify the size, right click and select Stretch. The prompts appearing in the command line are the same as the ones mentioned in the previous case, starting form the second one. Note: The entities crossing the selection window (rectangular or polygon) are stretched. The entities fully enclosed within the selection window are just moved. Extend: There are three ways available for extending a wall: 1. Using the grips that appear as soon as a wall is selected. To extend a wall using the grips, select the wall and when the grips appear click one of the end grips and drag it to the point up to which you want the wall to be extended.
progeCAD Architecture
239
2. Selecting AutoBLD > Wall > Extend executes the Extend command mentioned also further down. 3. Executing the Extend command of AutoCAD or progeCAD. This command is ) from the toolbars or by selecting executed by selecting the relevant icon ( Modify -> Extend from the menu or by typing "extend" in the command line and pressing Enter. The command prompts in cases 2 and 3 are: Select boundary entities for extend <ENTER to select all>: Select the wall or the walls comprising the extension boundaries and then press Enter or right click. Edge mode (E) / Fence (F) / Projection (P) / <Select entity to extend>): Select the wall that you want to extend and press Enter or right click.
1. Trim: Using the grips that appear as soon as a wall is selected. To trim a wall using the grips, select the wall and when the grips appear click one of the end grips and drag it to the point up to which you want the wall to be trimmed. 2. Selecting AutoBLD > Wall > Trim executes the Trim command mentioned also further down. 3. executed. 1. Executing the Trim command of AutoCAD or progeCAD. This command is executed by selecting the relevant icon ( ) from the toolbars or by selecting Modify -> Trim from the menu or by typing "trim" in the command line and pressing Enter. The command prompts in cases 2 and 3 are: Select cutting entities for trim <ENTER to select all>: Select the wall or the walls comprising the trimming boundaries and then press Enter or right click. Edge mode (E) / Fence (F) / Projection (P) / <Select entity to trim>): Select the wall that you want to trim and press Enter or right click.
Break: There are two ways available for cutting a piece from a wall. 1. Selecting AutoBLD > Wall > Break executes the Break command mentioned also further down. 2. Executing the Break command of AutoCAD or progeCAD. This command is ) from the toolbars or by selecting executed by selecting the relevant icon ( Modify -> Break from the menu or by typing "break" in the command line and pressing Enter. The command prompts in cases 1 and 2 are: Select entities to break: Select the wall or the walls comprising the breaking boundaries and then press Enter or right click. First break point (F) / <Second break point>): Specify the second breaking point of the wall. The first point is the point from which the wall is selected in the previous step. If you want to specify a different first breaking point, type F and press Enter. In this case, you can firstly specify the first breaking point and then the second one.
Unify: This option enables the user to unify two collinear walls into one. This command is executed by selecting AutoBLD > Wall > Unify from the menu or by typing "unify" in the command line and pressing Enter. The command prompts are: 240 Select 1st wall: Select the first wall you want unified. Select 2nd wall: Select the second wall. 4M
If the walls are not collinear and, therefore, cannot be logically composed into one, a message appears on the screen informing you that the walls are not collinear. The above wall data editing commands are found in the AutoBLD > Wall menu. However, there are also some other basic wall data editing commands, which will appear if you select one or more walls and right click on them. These options are detailed below: Mirror: There are two ways available for copying a wall with respect to an axis of symmetry: 1. Executing the Mirror command of AutoCAD or progeCAD. This command is executed by selecting the relevant icon ( ) from the toolbars or by selecting Modify -> Mirror from the menu or by typing "mirror" in the command line and pressing Enter. The command prompts are: Select entities to mirror: Select the wall or the walls you want to copy with respect to an axis of symmetry and then press Enter or right click. Start of mirror line: Specify the first point of the axis of symmetry. End of mirror line: Specify the second point of the axis of symmetry. Delete the original entities <N>: The program asks the user if the initially selected entities should be deleted. If you press Enter or right click, the entities shall not be deleted, whereas, if you type "Y" and press Enter, the selected entities shall be deleted.
2. After selecting the wall or the walls you want copied with respect to an axis of symmetry, right click and select Mirror. The prompts appearing in the command line are the same as the ones mentioned in the previous case, starting form the second one. Rotate: There are two ways available for rotating a wall: 1. Executing the Rotate command of AutoCAD or progeCAD. This command is executed by selecting the relevant icon ( ) from the toolbars or by selecting Modify -> Rotate from the menu or by typing "rotate" in the command line and pressing Enter. The command prompts are: Select entities to rotate: Select the wall or the walls you want to rotate and then press Enter or right click. Rotation point: Specify the fixed point with respect to which you want the selected walls to be rotated. Base angle (B) / <Rotation angle>: Specify the angle with respect to which you want the selected walls to be rotated. You can either type the angle value in degrees or show it on the drawing by rotating the cursor and clicking on the desired point.
2. After selecting the wall or the walls you want to rotate, right click and select Rotate. The prompts appearing in the command line are the same as the ones mentioned in the previous case, starting form the second one. 1. Scale: Executing the Scale command of AutoCAD or progeCAD. This command is executed by selecting the relevant icon ( ) from the toolbars or by selecting Modify -> Scale from the menu or by typing "scale" in the command line and pressing Enter. The command prompts are: progeCAD Architecture 241
Select entities to scale: Select the wall or the walls which you want to scale and then press Enter or right click. Base point: Select the base point with respect to which the scaling shall be performed. Base scale / <Scale factor>: Specify the ratio for scaling up or down the selected walls. You can either type the scaling ratio value or show it on the drawing by moving the cursor and clicking on the desired point. It should be mentioned that if you enter a value lower than 1, the selected walls shall shrink whereas, if you enter a value higher than 1, the selected walls shall be magnified.
2. After selecting the wall or the walls which you want scaled, right click and select Scale. The prompts appearing in the command line are the same as the ones mentioned in the previous case, starting form the second one. Base point: This option enables the user to specify a base point on the drawing, which shall be used during insertion into another. By default, the specified base point is <0,0,0>. Copy: There are two ways available for copying a wall: 1. Executing the Copy command of AutoCAD or progeCAD. This command is executed by selecting the relevant icon ( ) from the toolbars or by selecting Modify -> Copy from the menu or by typing "copy" in the command line and pressing Enter. The command prompts are: Select entities to copy: Select the wall or the walls you want to copy and then press Enter or right click. Multiple (M) / Vector (V) / <Base point>: Specify a fixed point on the entities you want to move. If you want to copy the selected walls more than once, type "M" and press Enter. Now the program prompts you to enter the base point. Displacement point: Specify the point where you want to copy the selected walls.
2. After selecting the wall or the walls you want to copy, right click and select Copy. The prompts appearing in the command line are the same as the ones mentioned in the previous case, starting form the second one. Undo: This option enables the user to undo the last command that was executed. Properties: This option enables the user to view the attributes of a wall and change a property, if necessary. The window appearing in this case is the same as the one mentioned above in the "Modify Wall" option.
242
4M
5.2 Opening
If the command "Opening" is activated, a second option menu is displayed where you can either select drawing one of the various opening types (window, sliding door, door etc) or use one of the "Erase", "Modify" or "Move" commands for an already drawn opening. At the bottom of this menu lies the very useful option Libraries, which was also mentioned in the previous chapter and which enables the user to define his own windows freely, drawing them according to his will. Drawing an opening leads to the following options: Window: In the option "Window" you must first select the wall on which the opening will be placed and then define the stating and the ending points of the opening (all these actions are carried out using the mouse and pressing <Enter> each time). The window will be automatically assigned the data that are predefined in the Characteristic Data, namely the corresponding values for the height, the rize, the coefficient k etc). Of course, you can draw the window from the ground plan as well as in the threedimensional (3D) view. During drawing a window, it is very helpful to the user the fact that, after selecting the wall where the window will be automatically placed, the distance from the wall edge is displayed in the coordinates position on the top of the screen, while the graphics cursor is transferred parallel to the wall for supervision reasons. The measurement starting point (distance 0) as well as the side (inner or outer) are defined, depending on which one of the two edges is closer and which side was "grabbed" during the wall selection. Example: Suppose you want to place a window at a distance of 1.30 from the outer side of the wall that is shown on the drawing. After having specified the desired window in the "Parameters -> Window" and selected the "Window" command for drawing, click a point of the outer side of the wall, on the ending point side, in relation to which you want the distance measured. Note that the graphics cursor becomes automatically parallel to the wall direction and the coordinates are zeroed on the top side.
In this way, in order to specify the first ending point of the window, all you have to do is type 1.30 in the command line (at the bottom), while if you insert a second point slightly below (with the mouse), you can specify the window direction, which is finally drawn with the length that has already been entered in "Parameters". Alternatively, you can enter its length in the command line right after typing the initial point.
progeCAD Architecture
243
Door: If the option "Door" is selected, you should point the wall where you want the door placed, define the beginning and the end of the door (the beginning also defines the axis where the door opens) and finally show (with a point) the side towards which it opens. In the following figure you can see the order in which the points 1, 2 and 3 are defined. The first point is entered according to either the screen coordinates or the relative coordinates (e.g. type "2.5" if you want to place the door axis in a distance 2.5 meters from the wall edge). The second point determines the door width and in case it is shorter than the length defined in the "Door Parameters" it is assigned this value. Finally, the third point is entered freely either on the one side of the wall or the other, since you simply determine the half-plane side towards which the door is placed. For measuring the distances from the wall edge, the same instructions referring to the window apply. Opening: The instructions regarding the window (see above) apply here as well. The only existing difference is its drawn image. For measuring the distances from the wall edge, the same instructions referring to the window apply. Finally, the opening management options are divided into the following: Erase: There are four ways available for deleting an opening: 1. After selecting the opening or the openings you want to delete, press Delete on the keypad. 2. Selecting AutoBLD > Opening > Erase executes the Erase command mentioned also further down. 3. Executing the Erase command of AutoCAD or progeCAD. This command is executed by selecting the relevant icon ( ) from the toolbars or by selecting Modify -> Erase from the menu or by typing "erase" in the command line and pressing Enter. The command prompts in cases 2 and 3 are: Select entities to delete: Select the opening or the openings you want to delete and then press Enter or right click.
4. After selecting the opening or the openings you want to delete, right click and select Erase Modify: Use this option to modify the features of any desired opening. Once you have activated this command, you are asked to select the opening and then specify, in the dialog box appearing on the screen (displaying the opening parameters), the desired new height, rize or type. This command is also activated by selecting the desired opening (via the left mouse button) and then right clicking and selecting Properties or even by double clicking on the desired opening. Multiple Change: Use this command to perform mass changes, e.g. modify the height of all the windows on a certain level. Click the walls with the existing openings that you want to edit, while the ability to add or remove to the pre-selected ones is granted, activate the desired field (e.g. the rize height) and enter the new value. Click "OK" for the corresponding updates to be performed.
244
4M
This command is also activated by successively selecting, via left clicking, the desired openings and then right clicking and selecting Properties. Move: There are four ways available for moving an opening: 1. Using the grips that appear as soon as an opening is selected. To move an opening using the grips, you should select the opening and when the grips appear click on the grip the lies in the centre of the opening and drag it. 2. Selecting AutoBLD > Opening > Move executes the Move command mentioned also further down. 3. Executing the Move command of AutoCAD or progeCAD. This command is executed by selecting the relevant icon ( ) from the toolbars or by selecting Modify -> Move from the menu or by typing "move" in the command line and pressing Enter. The command prompts in cases 2 and 3 are: Select entities to move: Select the opening or the openings you want to move and then press Enter or right click. Vector (V) / <Base point (B)>: Specify a fixed point on the entities you want to move. Displacement point: Specify the point where you want the selected entities moved.
4. After selecting the opening or the openings you want to move, right click and select Move. The prompts appearing in the command line are the same as the ones mentioned in the previous case, starting form the second one. Center: Select this option whenever you want to place an opening exactly in the middle of a wall (centering). If this option is selected, the program prompts you to click first the opening you want to center and then the side of the wall towards which you want this opening to be centered (in case the length of the two wall sides is not the same, e.g. outer and inner side). Library: This option is useful for user-defined openings and consists of 6 sub-options: Opening Shape, Opening Mode, Shutters, 3D Parametrical Openings, Windows and Doors. The management of each one of the above libraries is described in detail below. To create a new opening, door or window, you should first specify the shape of the opening, i.e. if the opening shall be rectangular of curved-angled etc, and then the opening mode, i.e. if the opening shall be glass or compact, sliding or hinged etc.
progeCAD Architecture
245
The following options are available in this dialog. Display: This field in the particular dialog is inactive. Display type: This field in the particular dialog is also inactive. Categories: In this field, there is no option of defining certain categories for the 3D parametrical openings. Slide type: This field in the particular dialog is inactive. Create: The following dialog window appears on the screen where you can create your own opening shape.
In order to use the commands of this dialog, you should first draw the shape of the opening you want to create near <0,0>, using a closed polyline. Attention: The last section of the polyline is defined by typing c (close) and not via an endpoint.
246
4M
The following example explains you how to create a shape. Example: Suppose you want to create a curved-angled shape, e.g. an arch. Using the polyline command of AutoCAD or progeCAD, draw the outline of the opening. Attention: If you want the bottom of the casing to be removable, you should specify the polyline from left to right, so that the endpoints of the polyline are at the bottom of the opening.
Select polyline: You are taken to the drawing where you should select the polyline you have already drawn.
1. Rise: You are taken to the drawing where you can set the rise of the opening. Note: Rise is defined as the vertical distance between the top of a shape and an inbetween point in the shape. In the case of an arch, rise is defined as the distance from the highest point of the arch arc to the point where the arch starts. Thus, you can specify an opening with specific arch height, e.g. 0.40m or 0.35m. If no rise value is entered, the height of the resulting arch shall be proportional to the ratio of the initial arch height to the total height of the opening. Defining rise enables defining of vaulted windows with variable arch ratios to the total height of the opening. Slide screen: You are taken to the drawing where you can select from a window what you want to appear in the slide. Then, right click and return to the above dialog. Save slide: The slide of the opening created is displayed in the black screen on the top of the dialog. Save drawing: Thus, the opening created is saved in the libraries and the program informs the user of the name of the block created, via a warning message.
Delete: This option enables you to delete an opening shape you have created. The program confirms deletion with a warning message. Copy: This option enables you to copy an opening shape to another location. The program informs the user of the block copied, via a warning message. Trim: This option enables you to move an opening shape from one location to another. The program informs the user of the block copied, via a warning message.
progeCAD Architecture
247
Paste: This option copies or moves the opening shape selected in the two previous options (Copy & Trim) to the desired location. The program prompts you to confirm the action to be executed. Locations Insert: This option enables you to insert a blank location for the creation of a new shape. The program informs the user of the point where the blank location is to be added, via a warning message. Locations Delete: This option enables you to delete a location where an opening shape has been created. The program informs the user of the location to be deleted, via a warning message. Locations Number: In this field, you can specify the number of the locations you want inserted or deleted. In the bottom left field you can type the name for the opening shape you created and, selecting Change name, the given name is transferred to the column lying on the left side of the dialog. On the top of the dialog, there are the Categories, Display, Display type and Slide type fields, which are inactive in the case of the opening shape. Finally, at the bottom of the dialog window you can see the options Previous and Next, which you can use to move between pages, as well as the options OK and Cancel.
The following options are available in this dialog. Display: This field enables you to select the opening modes you want displayed. The first option is "All", where all existing opening modes are shown, and the second option is "Categories", where the Categories field is activated. Display type: This option is inactive in this particular dialog. Categories: In this field you can select the categories of opening modes you want shown. When a category is selected (so that it appears in blue), you can select the checkbox on the left of "Display" by clicking on it and display all the opening modes belonging to that particular category. Click on All to select all categories and click on 248 4M
None to select no category. Clicking on Edit opens the dialog below, where you can set the desired categories.
To add a category, type the name you want in the field "Title" and click on Add. Clicking on Change, you can change the name of a category whereas clicking on Delete you can delete a category. Slide type: This field enables the user to select how he/she wants the existing opening modes to be displayed. You can select between displaying the slide of the opening modes or their rendered view. Create: The following dialog window appears on the screen where the user can create an opening mode of his/her own.
In order to use the commands of this dialog, you should first draw, with closed polylines or rectangular shapes, near 0,0, the opening mode you want to create. In fact, you should draw the frames which shall comprise the opening. The following options are available in this dialog: Slide Screen: You are taken to the drawing where you can select from a window what you want to appear in the slide. Slide Save: The slide of the opening mode created is displayed in the black screen on the top of the field "slide". 249
progeCAD Architecture
Frames Rise: This option enables the user to specify the desired rise for the particular opening mode.
Note: In the case of opening mode, a rise must be defined when the frames are placed so that they are separated in 2 parts. The upper frames that act as skylight and which may have no ability of opening and the lower frames which can open. Thus, in a rectangular opening shape, which is combined with opening mode consisting of a skylight frame and, below it, 2 frames which open on the right and on the left, if a rise is set in the opening mode, then you can insert similar windows with variable skylight height. For example, you can create a window 1.2m high with skylight frame 0.5m high and another window of the same type but with skylight 0.4m high. Moreover, if you combine an opening shape with rise with an opening mode with rise, then the program sets the ratio of the skylight frames to the lower frames, so that the skylight fits precisely in the rise of the opening shape, i.e. in the arch. Frames New: This option enables you to specify the frames comprising the opening mode you want to create. You are prompted to specify two points, which are the two diagonally opposite points of the frame. Frames Select: This option is an alternative way to specify the frames comprising the opening mode to be created. You are prompted to select the polyline making the frame. Frames Delete: This option enables you to delete a frame. Frames Modify: This option enables you to modify one of the frames. If, for example, you change the type of a frame, e.g. from frame with grass into compact frame, to save this change in the current frame, you should select the Modify option. Frame width: Specify the width of the frame. The default value is 0.05. Frame thickness: Specify the thickness of the frame. The default value is 0.05. Frame dimensions 3D Colour: This option enables you to select the colour of the frame in the 3D display as well as the material with which it will appear in rendering mode. Glass thickness: Specify the glass thickness, in case of a frame with glass or only glass. The default value is 0.001. Glasses 3D Colour: This option enables you to select the colour of the glass in the 3D display as well as the material with which it will appear in rendering mode. Categories: This option enables you to assign the opening mode to some of the categories you have created. Clicking on "All", all categories are selected whereas, clicking on "None", no category is selected. The "Edit" option opens the "Edit categories" dialog, where you can add, delete or change a category. Position depth: Specify the depth where the frame shall be positioned. This option is necessary in case of sliding openings, e.g. cascade, where the position depth should be set so that the 2 frames of the sliding opening open one next to the other. Typically, the value of the position depth is set equal to the frame thickness.
250
4M
Type: This option enables the user to set the type of the current frame. The available options are: compact, frame with glass, frame without glass, only grass and library. Selecting Library as frame type activates the option of choice between two 3D libraries (Library and User's library). Clicking on Type enables you to select a frame type whereas, clicking on Colours, enables you to change the colour of the various frame features. In case you select Compact as frame type, you can assign a material to the frame. To achieve this, you have to select the checkbox beside the option Material. Thus, you can choose between two libraries for the selection of the material (Library and User's library). Clicking on Material opens the Select Material or Select User's Material dialog, where you can choose the material you want to assign to the frame.
Attention: The "Material" option is activated in case the selected frame type is "Compact". Opening mode: This option enables the user to set the opening mode for the current frame. The following options are available: Not opening, Rotating, Moving and Accordion. The option Rotating activates the "Set rotation" dialog, where the following options are available:
1. Rotation axis: This option enables the user to set two points on the rotation axis of the frame. Clicking on Point 1 activates the drawing window, where, via the mouse and with snapping active, you can set the first point of the rotation axis. Similarly, you can also set the second point as well. 2. Closed Position Angle: This option enables the user to set the angle that is formed by the opening frame and the opening casing or the wall axis, when the frame is regarded compact. In most cases, this angle is zero. Note: An opening where this angle has a value different from zero is a cylindrical rotating door. To create such an opening mode, you should draw 3 rectangular frames, 1 of which is on the left and the other 2 on the right of the first one and the one onto the other. For the frame on the left, you should set as rotation axis the right vertical edge, closed position angle 60 and maximum turn angle 120. For the other two frames lying on the right, you should set as rotation axis the left vertical edge, closed position angle 0 for the one and 120 for the other and maximum turn angle 120 for both. In this opening mode, no casing is required. 3. Maximum Turn Angle: Specify the maximum angle by which the frame can rotate.
4. Symmetrical Turn: Set whether the frame shall rotate symmetrically. Selecting the
checkbox activates this option. The option Moving activates the "Set movement" dialog, where the following options are available: 1. Direction: This option enables you to specify the direction of the frame movement. The options Up, Down, Right and Left are available.
2. Maximum distance: This option activates the drawing window and enables you to
specify the maximum distance for the frame movement. The option Accordion activates the "Set accordion" dialog, where the following options are available: 1. Fixed edge: This option enables the user to set the fixed edge for the accordiontype frame. The options Left and Right are available.
2. type frame. The options Left and Right are available.
progeCAD Architecture
251
Blinds number: Set the number of blinds for the accordion. Attention: To select Accordion opening mode, you should have already selected Compact frame type. Separators: This option enables the user to specify if there shall be separators in the current frame or not. The available options are: No separators, Parallel separators and Radial separators. The option Parallel activates the relevant dialog, where you can set the number of the horizontal and vertical separators. The option Radial activates the relevant dialog, where you can set the centre and the number of the separators. Clicking on the centre activates the drawing window, where you can specify the point on the current frame using the mouse.
Attention: To set separators for the frame, you should have already selected Frame with glass or Frame without glass or Only glass as frame type. Separator: This option enables the user to set some properties of the separators. More particularly, you can set the width and the thickness of the separators. The default value is 0.010. Also, you can set the 3D Colour of the separators and the material with which they shall be displayed in rendering mode. Knob: This option enables the user to specify if there shall be a knob in the current frame or not. The available options are: No knob, Knob on side 1, Knob on side 2 and Knob on both sides. Typically, the first side is the top side of the wall, as shown on the ground plan. However, you should check towards which side frames open and specify the position of the knob accordingly. You can select the knob design from 2 libraries (Library and User's Library), where clicking on the Type option opens the relevant dialogs, where you can select the desired design.
Clicking on Position activates the drawing window, where you can specify on the frame the precise position of the knob. Finally, selecting 3D Colour, you can specify the colour of the frame in the 3D display as well as the material shown in the rendering mode. Attention: When you select Frame with glass or without glass as frame type, if you set as knob position a point precisely on the frame, i.e. on the frame line, then the program will centre the knob on the frame at the relevant position according to the frame width. This means that, if the width of the frame is 5cm, the knob shall be positioned 2.5cm inner than the position you have set. If you set a point inside the frame as knob position, then this position shall be scaled according to the final dimensions of the frame, i.e. the length and the height, resulting in the final position of the knob. When you select a compact frame or a frame from the library, the knob should be positioned inside and not precisely on the frame outline, whereas, when the frame is with or without glass, the knob should be positioned on the outline. The above mentioned are explained in the following example: Example: Suppose you want to create an opening comprising of 3 frames, where frame 1 is a frame with glass opening horizontally, frame 2 is hinged and compact and frame 3 is fixed, with glass and separators. Using the polyline or rectangular command of AutoCAD or progeCAD, draw the frames comprising the desired opening.
252
4M
Next act as follows: In the Edit User's Opening Mode dialog, select a blank location and click on New. In the new dialog, deselect the Rise checkbox and click on Select. The drawing window is activated, where you can select the polyline comprising the first frame. Clicking on Select again, you can select the other frames which comprise the opening mode you want to create. In the Frame dimensions 3D Colour option, on the top of the dialog, set 32 Wood Ash-coloured Middle and, in the Glasses 3D Colour option, set 4 Glass. Select frame 1 and, in the Position Depth option, leave value 0 whereas, in the current frame Type option, set frame with glass. In the Opening Mode option, select Rotating and, clicking on Point 1, you are taken to the drawing where you can specify the first point of the rotation axis. Likewise, clicking on Point 2, specify the second point of the rotation axis.
In the Maximum Turn Angle option, enter the value 90 and do not check the option Symmetrical Turn. Note that in the left part of the dialog, on the right side of the screen showing the current frame, there is the word "Modified", which means that you should click on Frames Modify to save the changes in the current frame. In the Separators option, select No separators. In the Knob option, set Side 1 and click on Position to activate the drawing window where you can set the centre of the top edge as knob position. Click on Frames Modify again to save the changes in the current frame. Select frame 2 and, in the Position Depth option, leave value 0 whereas, in the current frame Type option, set Compact. Click on Frames Modify to save changes in the current frame. In the Opening Mode option, select Rotating and, clicking on Point 1, you are taken to the drawing where you can specify the first point of the rotation axis. Likewise, clicking on Point 2, specify the second point of the rotation axis.
progeCAD Architecture
253
In the Maximum Turn Angle option, enter the value 90 and do not check the option Symmetrical Turn. In the Separators option, select No separators. In the Knob option, set Side 1 and click on Position to activate the drawing window where you can set the centre of the right edge as knob position. Since frame 2 is Compact, as mentioned above, the knob should be positioned inside and not precisely on the frame outline. Thus, go to field X and change the value from 0.800 to 0.780, so that the knob is not precisely on the outline but inside the frame. Click on Frames Modify again to save the changes in the current frame. Select frame 3 and, in the Position Depth option, leave value 0 whereas, in the current frame Type option, set Frame with glass. In the Opening mode option, set Not opening. In the Separators option, set Parallel and type number 3 in the Horizontal option. Click on Frames Modify to save the changes in the current frame and, finally, in the Knob option, set No knob. Clicking on Slide Screen activates the drawing window, where you can use a selection window to select the 3 frames you have already drawn. Then, right click to return to the New Opening Mode dialog. Clicking on Slide Save activates the drawing window where the program prompts you to enter Slide Type, Detail (D) or View (V). Type D and press Enter. Thus, the program automatically creates the slide of the drawn opening mode. You should select the categories assigned to the opening mode you have just created. In the Categories field, select the desired categories one-by-one (so that they appear in blue) and select the checkbox beside the Assigned option. Finally, click OK and the program will ask you if you want to save the block you have just created. Clicking on OK, the program informs you that the block is saved and you return to the first Edit Opening Mode dialog. In the bottom left box you can type the name of the Opening Mode you created. Clicking on Change Name saves the name.
The other options available in the first Edit Opening Mode dialog are the following: Delete: This option enables you to delete an opening mode you have created. The program confirms deletion with a warning message. Copy: This option enables you to copy an opening mode to another location. The program informs the user of the block copied, via a warning message. Trim: This option enables you to move an opening mode from one location to another. The program informs the user of the block copied, via a warning message. 254 4M
Paste: This option copies or moves the opening mode selected in the two previous options (Copy & Trim) to the desired location. The program prompts you to confirm the action to be executed. Locations Insert: This option enables you to insert a blank location for the creation of a new opening mode. The program informs the user of the point where the blank location is to be added, via a warning message. Locations Delete: This option enables you to delete a location where an opening mode has been created. The program informs the user of the location to be deleted, via a warning message. Locations Number: In this field, you can specify the number of the locations you want inserted or deleted. In the bottom left field you can type the name for the opening mode you created and, selecting Change name, the given name is transferred to the column lying on the left side of the dialog. Finally, at the bottom of the dialog you can see the options Previous and Next, which you can use to move between pages, as well as the options OK and Cancel.
The following options are available in this dialog. Display: This field enables you to select the shutters you want displayed. The first option is "All", where all existing shutters are shown, and the second option is "Categories", where the Categories field is activated. Display type: This field enables you to display the existing shutters in 3D or 2D view.
progeCAD Architecture
255
Categories: In this field you can select the categories of shutters you want to appear. When a category is selected (so that it appears in blue), you can select the checkbox on the left of "Display" by clicking on it and display all the shutters belonging to that particular category. Click on All to select all categories and click on None to select no category. Clicking on Edit opens the dialog below, where you can specify the desired categories.
To add a category, type the name you want in the field "Title" and click on Add. Clicking on Change, you can change the name of a category whereas clicking on Delete you can delete a category. Slide type: This field enables you to select the existing shutters view. You can select between displaying the slide of the shutters or their rendered view. Create: The user is led into the following screen where he/she can create a shutter of his/her own.
In order to use the commands of this dialog, you should draw, using closed polylines or rectangular shapes, near 0,0, the frames comprising the shutter you want to create.
256
4M
The following options are available in this dialog: 3D: This option enables you to set the properties of the shutter in 3D view and to create the shutter slide. More specifically: 1. 3D opening (%): Specify the opening percentage with which you want the shutter shown in 3D display.
progeCAD Architecture
257
5. Separators Add: This option enables you to add a separator at the specified level. 6. Separators Modify: This option enables you to modify a specified separator. 7. Separators Delete: This option enables you to delete a specified separator. Frame thickness: Specify the thickness of the frame. The default value is 0.050. 3D Colour: This option enables you to select the colour of the frame in the 3D display as well as the material with which it will appear in rendering mode. Opening mode: This option enables the user to set the opening mode of the frame. The following options are available: Hinged, Sliding and Roll. The Hinged option activates the Rotate dialog, where you can set the desired position of the rotation axes. The available options are Left and Right. Also, depending on the existing frames, in the Hinged dialog, the following options are activated: 2. Opening of 2nd panel: It is activated in case of 2 frames. This option enables you to set how the 2nd panel shall open. The available options are: Inclination of 1st, which follows the inclination of the first panel, Horizontal, where the second panel is horizontal and Symmetrical, where the second panel is symmetrical to the first one. 3. Opening of 3rd panel: It is activated in case of 3 frames. This option enables you to set how the 3rd panel shall open. The available options are the ones mentioned above. The Sliding option activates the Move dialog, where you can see the following options: 1. Direction: This option enables you to specify the direction of the frame movement. The available options are Right and Left. 2. Maximum distance: This option activates the drawing window and enables you to specify the maximum distance for the frame movement. Also, when Sliding is selected as opening mode, the Sliding Position option is activated, where the options In, Out (Side1) and Out (Side2) are available. If you select one of the options Out (Side1) and Out (Side2), the Sliding Guide option is activated, where you can select No, that is no guide for the sliding opening, Up, where the guide of the opening is on top, Down, where the guide of the opening is at the bottom and Up & Down, where the guide of the sliding opening is both on the top and at the bottom. Furthermore, you can set the width and the thickness of the guide of the sliding opening. The default values are 0.020 and 0.050, respectively. The Roll option activates the Maximum Distance option, which activates the drawing window and enables you to set the maximum distance for the roll movement. Frames New: This option enables you to specify the frames comprising the shutter you want to create. You are prompted to specify two points, which are the two diagonally opposite points of the frame. Frames Select: This option is an alternative way to set the frames comprising the shutter to be created. You are prompted to select the polyline making the frame.
258
4M
Frames Delete: This option enables you to delete a frame. Knob: This option enables the user to specify if the current frame shall have a knob or not. The available options are: No knob, Knob on side 1, Knob on side 2 and Knob on both sides. Typically, the first side is the top side of the wall, as shown on the ground plan. However, you should check towards which side the frames open and specify the position of the knob accordingly. You can select the knob design from 2 libraries (Library and User's Library), where clicking on the Type option opens the relevant dialogs, where you can select the desired design. Clicking on Position activates the drawing window, where you can specify on the frame the precise position of the knob. Finally, selecting 3D Colour, you can specify the colour of the frame in the 3D display as well as the material shown in the rendering mode.
Attention: The knob should be positioned inside the frame and not on the frame outline. The above mentioned are explained in the following example: Example: Suppose you want to create a two-panel hinged shutter, where each of the two parts shall consist of 3 panels. Follow the steps below: First, you should draw, near 0,0, using some closed polylines or the rectangular command of AutoCAD or progeCAD, the six frames comprising the shutter you want to create. In the New Shutter dialog, select a blank location and click on New. In the Frames dialog, click on Select and select the polyline comprising the first frame on the drawing. Clicking on Select again, set the other frames which comprise the opening mode you want to create. In this case, you should set six different frames. Select frame 1 and, in the Type option, set frame with blinds whereas, in the Frame Width option, leave unchanged the value 0.05. In the 3D Colour option, set 32 Wood Ash-coloured Middle. In the Opening Mode field, select Hinged and, in options Opening of 2nd Panel and Opening of 3rd Panel, select Horizontal. This means that, when the shutter is open, the second and the third panel shall be horizontal. In the Rotate Axis Position option, leave the option Left and, in the Knob option, set No knob. Select frame 2 and, in the Type option, leave unchanged the option frame with blinds and, in the Frame Width option, leave unchanged the value 0.05. Also, in the 3D Colour option, leave 32 Wood Ash-coloured Middle. In the Opening Mode field, select Hinged and, in options Opening of 2nd Panel and Opening of 3rd Panel, select Horizontal. This means that, when the shutter is open, the second and the third panel shall be horizontal. In the Rotate Axis Position option, leave unchanged the option Left and, in the Knob option, set No knob. Select frame 3 and set whatever you have already specified for the above 2 frames. In the Knob option, however, set Side1 and click on Position to activate the drawing window, where you can set the centre of the right side of the third frame as knob position. According to all the above mentioned, however, the knob should not be placed directly on the frame, but inside it. That's why you should go to the Position X option and change the value slightly so that the knob is transferred inside the frame. For example, if this value is 0.75, set it to 0.73.
progeCAD Architecture
259
Select frame 4 and set whatever you have already specified for the above frames. In the Rotate Axis Position option, leave unchanged the Right option and, in the Knob option, set Side1 and click on Position to activate the drawing window, where you can set the centre of the left side of the forth frame as knob position. According to all the above mentioned, however, the knob should not be placed directly on the frame, but inside it. That's why you should go to the Position X option and change the value slightly so that the knob is transferred inside the frame. For example, if this value is 0.75, set it to 0.77. Select frame 5 and set whatever you have already specified for the above frames. In the Rotate Axis Position option, leave unchanged the option Right and, in the Knob option, set No knob. Similarly, select frame 6 and set whatever you have already specified for the above frames. In the Rotate Axis Position option, leave unchanged the option Right and, in the Knob option, set No knob. Select the categories to assign to the shutter you have just created. In the Categories field, select the desired categories one-by-one (so that they appear in blue) and select the checkbox beside the Assigned option. In the 3D Opening option (%), set 0 and click on 3D Preview. You can see the shutter slide on the screen. Type M, to have the slide file created, and press Enter. The program informs you of the file created; click OK. To return to the New Shutter dialog, right-click and click OK to the prompt "Exit Preview?". In the 2D dialog, set opening percentage equal to 30 and click on 2D Preview to have the slide of the ground plan of the shutter created. Type M, to have the slide file created, and press Enter. The program informs you of the file created; click OK. To return to the New Shutter dialog, right-click and click OK to the prompt "Exit Preview?". Finally, click OK and the program prompts you to save the block you have just created. Clicking on OK, the program informs you that the block is saved and you return to the first Edit Parametrical Shutter dialog. In the bottom left box you can type the name of the Shutter you created. Clicking on Change Name saves the name.
Delete: This option enables you to delete a shutter you have created. The program confirms deletion with a warning message. Copy: This option enables you to copy a shutter to another location. The program informs the user of the block copied, via a warning message. Trim: This option enables you to move a shutter from one location to another. The program informs the user of the block copied, via a warning message. Paste: This option copies or moves the shutter selected in the two previous options (Copy & Trim) to the desired location. The program prompts you to confirm the action to be executed. Locations Insert: This option enables you to insert a blank location for the creation of a new shutter. The program informs the user of the point where the blank location is to be added, via a warning message. Locations Delete: This option enables you to delete a location where a shutter has been created. The program informs the user of the location to be deleted, via a warning message.
260
4M
Locations Number: In this field, you can specify the number of the locations you want inserted or deleted. In the bottom left field you can type the name for the shutter you created and, selecting Change name, the given name is transferred to the column lying on the left side of the dialog. Finally, at the bottom of the dialog you can see the options Previous and Next, which you can use to move between pages, as well as the options OK and Cancel.
The following options are available in this dialog. Display: This field in the particular dialog is inactive. Display type: This field in the particular dialog is also inactive. Categories: In this field, there is no option of defining certain categories for the 3D parametrical openings. Slide type: This field in the particular dialog is inactive. Create: The following screen appears where the user can create a 3D opening of his/her own.
progeCAD Architecture
261
In order to use the commands of this dialog box, you should first draw a window section following some simple rules: Use closed polylines (which include straight or curved sections) to specify the outlines for the surfaces and the glasses and straight lines to specify the separators. The window outer outline does not necessarily have to be rectangular. It could be of any shape, since the remaining part will be automatically filled with wall. The following example explains all the above: Example: Suppose you want to create the window of the following figure (the figure is intentionally asymmetrical, so that you can understand that the program can create all possible shapes).
Run the command "polyline" of progeCAD to define the outer outline of the window and the outline of the glass and select "line" to define the separators, exactly as shown in the adjacent figure.
262
4M
Next act as follows: In the "New User's Opening" dialog, click the "Surfaces" key and select the outer polyline, leaving the default thickness at 0.05. Select "Glasses-Select" and select the polyline for the glass. Select "Separators-Select" and select the two lines for the separators. Select "Solid Object" to have the opening converted into a three-dimensional drawing. Select "Icon-Slide screen" to select what you want to be shown in the slide. Select "Icon-Save Slide" to have the opening slide created. Select "Insertion Point" and provide the point in relation to which the opening will be inserted. Select "Pattern length" and show on the screen the length of the drawn prototype opening or just type it. Select "Pattern height" and show on the screen the height of the drawn prototype opening or just type it. Select "Save Drawing"; if you select the drawing that appears currently on the screen, it is saved in the 3D openings library. Select "Close" to exit the dialog screen. Delete: This option enables you to delete a 3D parametrical opening you have created. The program confirms the deletion with a warning message. Copy: This option enables you to copy a 3D parametrical opening to another location. The program informs the user of the block copied, via a warning message. Trim: This option enables you to move a 3D parametrical opening from one location to another. The program informs the user of the block copied, via a warning message. Paste: This option copies or moves the 3D parametrical opening selected in the two previous options (Copy & Trim) to the desired location. The program prompts you to confirm the action to be executed. Locations Insert: This option enables you to insert a blank location for the creation of a new 3D parametrical opening. The program informs the user of the point where the blank location is to be added, via a warning message.
progeCAD Architecture
263
Locations Delete: This option enables you to delete a location where a 3D parametrical opening has been created. The program informs the user of the location to be deleted, via a warning message. Locations Number: In this field, you can specify the number of the locations you want inserted or deleted. In the bottom left field you can type the name for the 3D parametrical opening you created and, selecting Change name, the given name is transferred to the column lying on the left side of the dialog. Finally, at the bottom of the dialog you can see the options Previous and Next, which you can use to move between pages, as well as the options OK and Cancel.
The following options are available in this dialog: Display: This field enables you to select the windows you want displayed. The first option is "All", where all existing windows are shown, and the second option is "Categories", where the Categories field is activated. Display type: This field enables you to display the existing windows in 3D or 2D view. Categories: In this field you can select the categories of windows you want to appear. When a category is selected (so that it appears in blue), you can select the checkbox on the left of "Display" by clicking on it and display all the windows belonging to that particular category. Click on All to select all categories and click on None to select no category. Clicking on Edit opens the dialog below, where you can specify the desired categories.
264
4M
To add a category, type the name you want in the field "Title" and click on Add. Clicking on Change, you can change the name of a category whereas clicking on Delete you can delete a category. Slide type: This field enables you to select the existing windows view. You can select between displaying the slide of the windows or their rendered view. Create: The following dialog window appears on the screen where the user can create a window of his/her own.
The following options are available in this dialog: Opening shape: This option enables you to select the opening shape of the window. You can select a shape from the Library or the User's Library. Clicking on Opening Shape opens the Edit Opening Shape dialog, where you can select the shape you want and click OK. The other options available in this dialog have already been described in detail.
progeCAD Architecture
265
Opening mode: This option enables you to select the opening mode of the window. You can select an opening mode from the Library or the User's Library. Clicking on Opening Mode opens the Edit Opening Mode dialog, where you can select the opening mode you want and click OK. The other options available in this dialog have already been described in detail. Casing: This option enables you to specify the characteristics of the casing. 1. Existing: This option enables the user to specify if there shall be casing for the windows or not. Selecting this checkbox activates the other options. 2. Width: Specify the width of the casing. The default value is 0.050. 3. Thickness: Specify the thickness of the casing. The default value is 0.100. 4. Equal to wall width: Selecting the checkbox beside this option, you specify that the width of the casing shall be equal to the width of the wall where it is placed. 5. There is casing at the bottom: This option enables you to set if you want casing at the bottom of the window or not. 6. 3D Colour: This option enables you to select the colour of the casing in the 3D display as well as the material of the casing in the rendering mode.
3D: This option enables you to set the properties of the window in 3D display and to create the window slide. More specifically: 1. Length: Specify the length of the window. 2. Height: Specify the height of the window. 3. Opening percentage: Specify the opening percentage with which you want the window displayed. 4. 3D Preview: Clicking on this option creates the slide of the window on the screen. There are various options available: View (V), where you can see the window in various views (up, front, right, axonometric), Zoom (Z), where you can zoom in the window you created, Netting (W), where you can see the window coloured, Hide lines (H), where you can see the window in hidden mode, Shading (S), where you can see the window shaded, Rendering (R), where you can see the window rendered, Slide file (M), where the program creates the necessary file for the slide of the window and, via a warning message, informs the user of the file created and, finally, File bmp (B), where the program creates the necessary rendering file and, via a warning message, informs the user of the file created. 5. Finally, the "Slide" and "Rendering" options enable the user to see the window in netting or rendering mode, respectively.
2D Parametrical: This option enables the user to create the ground plan of the window. Select the checkbox before the word Parametrical in order to activate this dialog. Without a checkmark, the 2D Parametrical dialog is inactive and the 2D Library dialog, which is described further down, is activated. More specifically, the following options are available in the 2D Parametrical dialog: 1. Show rise frames: This option enables you to specify if you want the rise frame to appear in the ground plan slide. 2. Show wall lines: This option enables you to specify if you want the wall lines to appear in the ground plan slide.
266
4M
3. 2D Preview: Clicking on this option creates the slide of the window ground plan on the screen. The options mentioned above are also available here. 4. Opening percentage: Specify the opening percentage with which you want the window displayed. 2D Library: This option is active if there is no checkmark in the checkbox beside the word Parametrical, as mentioned above. The available options are Library and User's Library, where clicking on 2D Library opens the relative dialog, from which you can select the drawing of the ground plan for the window. Categories: This option enables you to assign the window you created to some of the categories you have specified. Clicking on All, all categories are selected whereas, clicking on None, no category is selected. The "Edit" option opens the "Edit categories" dialog, where you can add, delete or change a category.
The following example explains how you can create a window. Example: Suppose you want to create a single-panel sliding rectangular window with separators. Follow the steps below:
In the Edit Parametrical Window dialog, select a blank location and click on New. Click on Opening Shape and, in the Edit Opening Shape dialog, select the desired shape of the window. In this case, set rectangular. Click on Opening Mode and, in the Edit Opening Mode dialog, select the way in which the window shall open. In this case, set an opening mode which consists of a frame with glass, is sliding and has separators. Select the option of having a casing at the bottom and leave unchanged the default values for width and thickness. Set Length 1.000, Height 1.200, Opening percentage 50 and click on 3D Preview. You can see the window slide on the screen. Type M, to have the slide file created, and press Enter. The program informs you of the file created; click OK. To return to the New Window dialog, right-click and click OK to the prompt "Exit Preview?". Click on 2D Preview to create the slide for the window ground plan. Type M, to have the slide file created, and press Enter. The program informs you of the file created; click OK. To return to the New Window dialog, right-click and click OK to the prompt "Exit Preview?". Finally, depending on the specified categories, select the ones to which the window shall be assigned.
After the above procedure, the New Window dialog should be as follows:
progeCAD Architecture
267
Clicking on OK, the program informs you of the block created. Finally, in the Edit User's Parametrical Window dialog, type the name of the window you created and click on Change Name to save it. Delete: This option enables you to delete a window you have created. The program confirms deletion with a warning message. Copy: This option enables you to copy a window to another location. The program informs the user of the block copied, via a warning message. Trim: This option enables you to move a window from one location to another. The program informs the user of the block copied, via a warning message. Paste: This option copies or moves the window selected in the two previous options (Copy & Trim) to the desired location. The program prompts for confirmation of the action to be executed. Locations Insert: This option enables you to insert a blank location for the creation of a new window. The program informs the user of the point where the blank location is to be added, via a warning message. Locations Delete: This option enables you to delete a location where a window has been created. The program informs the user of the location to be deleted, via a warning message. Locations Number: In this field, you can specify the number of the locations you want inserted or deleted. In the bottom left field you can type the name for the window you created and, selecting Change name, the given name is transferred to the column lying on the left side of the dialog.
268
4M
Finally, at the bottom of the dialog, you can see the options Previous and Next, which you can use to move between pages, as well as the options OK and Cancel.
The following options are available in this dialog. Display: This field enables you to select the doors you want displayed. The first option is "All", where all existing doors are shown, and the second option is "Categories", where the Categories field is activated. Display type: This field enables you to display the existing doors in 3D or 2D display. Categories: In this field you can select the categories of doors you want to appear. When a category is selected (so that it appears in blue), you can select the checkbox on the left of "Display" by clicking on it and display all the doors belonging to that particular category. Click on All to select all categories and click on None to select no category. Clicking on Edit opens the dialog below, where you can specify the desired categories.
To add a category, type the name you want in the field "Title" and click on Add. Clicking on Change, you can change the name of a category whereas clicking on Delete you can delete a category. progeCAD Architecture 269
Slide type: This field enables you to select the existing doors view. You can select between displaying the slide of the doors or their rendered view. New: The following dialog window appears on the screen where the user can create a door of his/her own.
The following options are available in this dialog: Opening shape: This option enables selecting the opening shape of the door. You can select a shape from the Library or the User's Library. Clicking on Opening Shape opens the Edit Opening Shape dialog, where you can select the shape you want and click OK. The other options available in this dialog have already been described in detail. Opening mode: This option enables you to select the opening mode of the door. You can select an opening mode from the Library or the User's Library. Clicking on Opening Mode opens the Edit Opening Mode dialog, where you can select the opening mode you want and click OK. The other options available in this dialog have already been described in detail. Casing: This option enables you to specify the characteristics of the casing. 1. Existing: This option enables the user to specify if there shall be casing for the door or not. Selecting this checkbox activates the other options. 2. Width: Specify the width of the casing. The default value is 0.050. 3. Thickness: Specify the thickness of the casing. The default value is 0.100. 4. Equal to wall width: Selecting the checkbox beside this option, you specify that the width of the casing shall be equal to the width of the wall where it is placed.
270
4M
5. There is casing at the bottom: This option enables you to set if you want casing at the bottom of the door or not. 6. 3D Colour: This option enables you to select the colour of the casing in the 3D display as well as the material of the casing in the rendering mode. 3D: This option enables you to set the properties of the door in 3D display and to create the door slide. More specifically: 2. Length: Specify the length of the door. 3. Height: Specify the height of the door. 4. Opening percentage: Specify the opening percentage with which you want the door displayed. 5. 3D Preview: Clicking on this option creates the slide of the door on the screen. There are various options available: View (V), where you can see the door in various views (up, front, right, axonometric), Zoom (Z), where you can zoom in the door you created, Netting (W), where you can see the door coloured, Hide lines (H), where you can see the door in hidden mode, Shading (S), where you can see the door shaded, Rendering (R), where you can see the door rendered, Slide file (M), where the program creates the necessary file for the slide of the door and, via a warning message, informs the user of the file created and, finally, File bmp (B), where the program creates the necessary rendering file and, via a warning message, informs the user of the file created. 6. Finally, the "Slide" and "Rendering" options enable the user to see the door in netting or rendering mode, respectively. 2D Parametrical: This option enables the user to create the ground plan of the door. Select the checkbox before the word Parametrical in order to activate this dialog. Without a checkmark, the 2D Parametrical dialog is inactive and the 2D Library dialog, which is described further down, is activated. More specifically, the following options are available in the 2D Parametrical dialog: 1. Show rise frames: This option enables you to specify if you want the rise frame to appear in the ground plan slide. 2. Show wall lines: This option enables you to specify if you want the wall lines to appear in the ground plan slide. 3. 2D Preview: Clicking on this option creates the slide of the ground plan of the door on the screen. The options mentioned above are also available here. 4. Opening percentage: Specify the opening percentage with which you want the door displayed. 2D Library: This option is active if there is no checkmark in the checkbox beside the word Parametrical, as mentioned above. The available options are Library and User's Library, where clicking on 2D Library opens the relative dialog, from which you can select the drawing of the ground plan for the door. Categories: This option enables you to assign the door you created to some of the categories you have specified. Clicking on All, all categories are selected whereas, clicking on None, no category is selected. The "Edit" option opens the "Edit categories" dialog, where you can add, delete or change a category.
progeCAD Architecture
271
The following example explains how you can create a door. Example: Suppose you want to create a two-panel openable door with glass, which shall be curved-angled and have a fixed upper part with separators. Follow the steps below: In the Edit Parametrical Door dialog, select a blank location and click on New. Click on Opening Shape and, in the Edit Opening Shape dialog, select the desired shape of the door. In this case, set curved-angled. Click on Opening Mode and, in the Edit Opening Mode dialog, select the way in which the door shall open. In this case, specify an opening mode which consists of 3 frames with glass, where the upper one is fixed with 3 radial separators and the other 2 are openable.
Select the option of having no casing at the bottom and leave unchanged the default values for width and thickness. Set Length 1.500, Height 2.200, Opening percentage 0 and click on 3D Preview. You can see the door slide on the screen. Type M, to have the slide file created, and press Enter. The program informs you of the file created; click OK. To return to the New Door dialog, right-click and click OK to the prompt "Exit Preview?". In the 2D Parametrical dialog, set opening percentage equal to 100 and click on 2D Preview to have the slide of the ground plan of the door created. Type M, to have the slide file created, and press Enter. The program informs you of the file created; click OK. To return to the New Door dialog, right-click and click OK to the prompt "Exit Preview?". Finally, depending on the specified categories, select the ones to which the door shall be assigned.
After the above procedure, the New Door dialog should be as follows:
272
4M
Clicking on OK, the program informs you of the block created. Finally, in the Edit User's Parametrical Door dialog, type the name of the door you created and click on Change Name to save it. Delete: This option enables you to delete a door you have created. The program confirms deletion with a warning message. Copy: This option enables you to copy a door to another location. The program informs the user of the block copied, via a warning message. Trim: This option enables you to move a door from one location to another. The program informs the user of the block copied, via a warning message. Paste: This option copies or moves the door selected in the two previous options (Copy & Trim) to the desired location. The program prompts you to confirm the action to be executed. Locations Insert: This option enables you to insert a blank location for the creation of a new door. The program informs the user of the point where the blank location is to be added, via a warning message. Locations Delete: This option enables you to delete a location where a door has been created. The program informs the user of the location to be deleted, via a warning message. Locations Number: In this field, you can specify the number of the locations you want inserted or deleted. In the bottom left field you can type the name for the door you created and, selecting Change name, the given name is transferred to the column on the left side of the dialog.
progeCAD Architecture
273
Finally, at the bottom of the dialog you can see the options Previous and Next, which you can use to move between pages, as well as the options OK and Cancel. Below you can find a complete example regarding the creation of a window. Example: Suppose you want to create a window that is two-panel, cascade, sliding, with separators and has an upper frame which is reclining. Follow the following steps: In the Edit User's Parametrical Window dialog, select a blank location and click on New. Click on Opening Shape and, in the Edit Opening Shape dialog, select the desired shape of the window. In this case, set rectangular. Click on Opening Mode and, in the Edit Opening Mode dialog, select the way in which the window shall open. In this particular case, specify an opening mode, which consists of 3 frames with glass, where the upper frame is reclining and the two below are sliding cascade frames and also have parallel separators. Select the option of having a casing at the bottom and leave unchanged the default values for width and thickness. Set Length 1.000, Height 1.200, Opening percentage 30 and click on 3D Preview. You can see the window slide on the screen. Type M, to have the slide file created, and press Enter. The program informs you of the file created; click OK. To return to the New Window dialog, right-click and click OK to the prompt "Exit Preview?". Click on 2D Preview to create the slide for the window ground plan. Type M, to have the slide file created, and press Enter. The program informs you of the file created; click OK. To return to the New Window dialog, right-click and click OK to the prompt "Exit Preview?". Finally, depending on the specified categories, select the ones to which the window shall be assigned. After the above procedure, the New Window dialog shall be as follows:
274
4M
Clicking on OK, the program informs you of the block created. Finally, in the Edit User's Parametrical Window dialog, type the name of the window you created and click on Change Name to save it.
progeCAD Architecture
275
5.3 Column
If Column>Placement is selected, the following dialog box is displayed, with all the necessary features of the column or the prop you are going to draw.
Generally, the column definition may be performed with either points or polylines. If the column cross section is rectangular, activate the box below and define width, thickness and angle. If the column cross section is circular, activate the box below with the column radius. The values for the level and height of the column are lower while on the right you have the ability to define the column Filling with 3 alternative options: Empty, Solid or Hatch. In the last case you can define scale (density) and angle, by updating the corresponding values that are displayed in the window. If any Column is defined, e.g. Rectangular, by clicking OK it is inserted in the drawing for the user to place. Use the snap points to place the edge of the column on any characteristic point (e.g. the wall endpoint, the nearest wall side point etc). Next, having defined the column edge you can turn it if you wish to place it exactly where you want (also by using the snap points). Once you have placed the column, if it is placed on a wall, you can hide the unwanted lines by running the progeCAD "HIDE" command (see the example below). At the same time the wall preserves its entity (it does not break in two parts). You can also move a corner of the prop using the grips. This means that, after selecting the prop to activate the grips, you can grab anyone of them and move it towards the desired location.
276
4M
Notes: When a column is placed on a wall and the outline is too thin for some wall lines to be visible, you can hide the lines with the option HIDE (for the screen display as well as the printout where the HIDE LINES option should be selected). Note that the column and the hatching comprise a single object. Therefore, it can be copied, deleted, moved etc like all the other progeCAD elements. Columns and walls are placed on different layers so that they can be edited separately. Specifically, the layer name for the two-dimensional Column is Build_columns_2d, while the layer name for the three-dimensional Column is Build_columns_3d. Columns can be deleted through the progeCAD "Erase" command. Copying columns is allowed through the respective progeCAD command or even the "Array" command in case you want to draw a grid of columns. Moreover, the copies (that were created through COPY) of an original column will all be assigned the new changes that will take place to the original column or to any other copy. Selecting "Pillar > Modify" enables you to modify the properties of a pillar you have already drawn. The program asks you to select the pillar and then you can modify the properties you want in the appearing dialog which is also mentioned above. Moreover, a pillar can also be modified by double clicking it, or by selecting the pillar, right clicking and selecting "Properties".
5.4 Slab
This option is used for the slab definition on a building level.
As shown above, in the corresponding "Slab" dialog screen, the dialog of this option includes the following keys-options with the functions described below:
Outer Outline: This command enables the user to define the slab outline.
Polyline: By selecting "Polyline", all you have to do is use the mouse to "show" any already drawn closed polyline (with straight and round sides) in order to convert it into a slab with the level and thickness that is displayed on the bottom left of the dialog box. Points: Alternatively, instead of a polyline you can define a series of points for the Slab definition. Specifically, by activating this option, the following message is displayed: Outline type \Polygonal()\Circular(C):
progeCAD Architecture
277
If the user types "P", the program will allow him/her to draw the slab outline, by entering the polygonal vertices which define it. If the user types "C", the program will allow him/her to draw a slab with circular outline. Hole: This command enables the user to define any holes (spaces) that exist in the slab. Polyline: Clicking any closed polyline that is contained in the Slab outline converts it into a Hole. Points: Alternatively, instead of defining the Hole by Polyline, you can define it by points. In this case the following message is displayed: Outline type \Polygonal()\Circular(C): If the user types "P", the program will allow him/her to draw the hole outline, by entering the polygonal vertices which define it. If the user types "C", the program will allow him/her to draw a hole with a circular outline. Elevation: Define the level (in m) where the lower surface of the slab will be placed with regard to the current floor level. Width: Define the slab thickness (in m), which should be a positive number. The following commands provide outline modification features that have already been defined: Outline-Move: It enables the user to move a slab that is already created. Outline-Delete: It enables the user to delete a slab that is already created. Outline-Rotate: It enables the user to turn a slab that is already created. Point-Add: It enables the user to add a new vertex to the outline of a slab that is already created. Point-Move: It enables the user to move a vertex of a slab that is already created. Point-Delete: It enables the user to delete an existing vertex of a slab outline that is already created. Note: You can run the command "slab" to draw any element (e.g. low walls, horizontal or vertical elements etc). Furthermore, you can draw a slab on the ground plan and then rotate in three dimensions through the "rotate3D" command, so the rotation axis and the rotation angle will be requested. This way you can construct inclined slabs. Moreover, by combining the "slab" with "rotate3D" commands you can draw practically any element (e.g. inclined slabs with holes, gables, pergolas etc).
278
4M
Example: Suppose you want to draw the slab that is shown below, by entering Points (second way):
Select "Slab -> Placement" in the menu and "Outline" in the appearing dialog window. Then type "P" and press <Enter>. You are now ready to start drawing the slab outline, with the mouse, by "pointing" the outline endpoints (by left clicking). Once you have defined the last point, right click and the slab is automatically shaped. If you right click once more, the dialog screen "Slab" is displayed so that you can continue with its definition (until you finally click "OK" at the bottom side).
In order to draw the circular hole, click the key "hole" and "C" (circular) and then press <Enter>. Left click at the hole centre and then move the mouse to define the circle radius. Left click to set the radius definite and afterwards press <Enter> (accepting the section number e.g. 16) for the hole to be drawn. Once you have completed the hole and right clicked, the dialog window "Slab" appears again.
progeCAD Architecture
279
You can continue editing the slab, but in order to complete the above example, all you have to do is insert "-0.25" for level and "0.25" for thickness, so that the slab is placed at the appropriate height. Select "3D View" to see that the slab is placed exactly the way you wanted. Select "Modify" to come back any time and perform any changes through the corresponding command-keys that were described above. The above slab can be easier defined by a polyline (1st way) since all you have to do is primarily draw a closed polyline, shaped as the slab outline, and a circular polyline with the hole size. Next run the command "Slab"->"Placement" and in the displayed window select "Outline Polyline", so you "show" the outline with the mouse, and then select "Hole-Polyline", so you "show" the hole. Next watch the slab being drawn, with the thickness and the other dialog box characteristics.
It is useful to practise through various examples so that the user can understand how a slab is dynamically configured and comprehend the utilities provided by the program.
Note: The slab configuration is not always instant but it may take a few seconds. Selecting "Slab > Modify" enables you to modify the properties of a slab you have already drawn. The program asks you to select the slab and then you can modify the properties you want in the appearing dialog which is also mentioned above. Moreover, a slab can also be modified by double clicking on it, or by selecting the slab, right clicking and selecting "Properties".
5.5 Beam
Selecting "Beam > Position" displays the following dialog, with only the keys enabling the beam specification activated, that is the "Points" and "Polyline" keys.
280
4M
After the user has geometrically specified the beam, as well as the development side, the following window returns with the other properties of the beam activated.
These properties are identical to the ones appearing in the "Element parameters" screen mentioned in the previous chapter. The user may modify any of the above parameters (e.g. the width of the beam, its colour etc) in the following ways: By selecting "Beam > Modify", where the program prompts you to select the beam, the dialog also mentioned above appears and the user modifies the desired parameters, by double clicking on the beam and, finally, by selecting the beam, right clicking on it and selecting "Properties".
progeCAD Architecture
281
In this dialog, you can select the desired floor type; clicking "Accept" activates the drawing window, where the program prompts you to specify the outline points of the floor. To modify the floor type, select "Modify". The program prompts you to select the floor you want to modify. Moreover, a floor can be modified by double clicking on it or by selecting the floor, right clicking on it and selecting "Properties". Selecting Roof displays the following dialog:
In this dialog, you can select the desired roof type; clicking "Accept" activates the drawing window, where the program prompts you to specify the outline points of the roof. To modify the roof type, select "Modify". The program prompts you to select the roof you want to modify. Moreover, a roof can be modified by double clicking on it or by selecting the roof, right clicking on it and selecting "Properties".
282
4M
progeCAD Architecture
283
Regarding the sub-categories of the 3rd group, that is view libraries, these are the following: 1. Windows: 2. Doors: 3. Trees 4. People - Cars 5. Hydraulics 6. Drawers 1 7. Drawers 2 8. Details 1 9. Details 2 These drawings are nothing more than the program libraries drawings, which can be enhanced or updated by the user, according to what is mentioned under the corresponding command "Libraries-Drawings", which is described below. By selecting a drawing or symbol, this is automatically placed on the corresponding layer, namely an individual layer corresponds to each one of the drawing categories. This is done for better drawing management, e.g. the user may want to isolate the plants from the drawing or all the symbols except the hydraulic receptors. In this case, the user should select the option "LAYER CONTROL" and FREEZE the layers of the library categories which he/she wishes to hide. In order to make this easier, the library layers have standard names in the form of "BUILD_FL00x_LIBS_y". Thus, for example, the layer named "BUILD_FL001_LIBS_6" stands for category 6 Symbols that have been placed on the first floor (level), the layer named "BUILD_FL003_LIBS_1" stands for category 1 Symbols that have been placed on the third floor etc. Note that any deactivation is temporary, namely in case the user exits the floor (level) x, enters any other and returns to the x floor, then all the library layers of this floor will be displayed, regardless if he had deactivated them.
284
4M
In order to place a symbol in your drawing, you should first select the library category where it belongs and then select the specific symbol. Specifically, by selecting one of the aforementioned library categories, a screen appears with the slides of the specific library category, where the user can select the desired symbol to be placed on the ground plan. For example, by selecting from the 3rd library group (views), the plant-tree category etc, the following slides screen is displayed:
Placement is carried out through the known features of progeCAD, and more specifically: In the selected library symbol or drawing screen, press <Enter> on the symbol you desire and then press "OK". During insertion, the program prompts you to enter only the position where the drawing will be placed. All you have to do then is left click on the proper spot to set the placement position definite.
Next you can provide the angle according to which the object will be placed, by moving the mouse respectively.
progeCAD Architecture
285
Left click to set the object placement completely definite. Note that, once the indication "scale xy" (on the top left) is activated, you can zoom in (or out) the corresponding symbol by x and y during the symbol placement. This is done by moving the mouse, immediately after you have placed the selected symbol on the drawing. Through various relative tests the user can easily comprehend the way symbols are placed on ground plans.
286
4M
6.1 Roof
The "Roof" command creates all kinds of roofs in three dimensions (3D) as well as their projections on the drawing surface (2D); it also allows the selection of hatch on the 3D drawing and the ground plan.
Selecting the Roof drawing command displays the following dialog box:
progeCAD Architecture
287
Depending on the selected roof type, a dialog box will appear, prompting the user to enter the characteristic points of the roof, the roof height, its protruding distance from the wall etc. The following sections describe the various roof types and their parameters, in the order they appear in the menu. Single-sided Roof: When "Single-sided Roof" is selected, the following dialog box appears, where you can choose "Points" and define the single-sided roof. More specifically, three points have to be specified, the two of which define the horizontal side of the roof and the third defines the roof plane following the inclination that has been entered in the roof parameters.
288
4M
Two-sided Roof: Similarly to the previous case, the following dialog box appears where three points should be specified. Two of these points define one of the horizontal sides of the roof, while the third which is at the opposite side is specified in such a way that the ridge is equidistant from points 2 and 3. The user can easily comprehend the drawing of a two-sided roof by trying a simple test.
Four-sided Roof: In the four-sided roof dialog box, select 3 points to specify the roof. The first two of these points define one horizontal side, whereas the 2nd and the 3rd point define the other horizontal side. The program assumes that both sides are equally inclined and specifies the roof vertices automatically.
progeCAD Architecture
289
Isoclinal and Anisoclinal roof: The dialog box shown next will appear.
To draw an isoclinal or anisoclinal roof, you can either select "Points" and determine one by one all the edges on the ground plan (after determining the last point, you must right-click to indicate that there will be no other points) or select "Polyline" and point on a closed polyline (the outline of which must have already been drawn). You should also make sure that the inclination, height, elevation, width and extension of the roof from the outer sides of the walls is correct. The exact data you have to enter are the following: Points: Specify the points (vertices) of the roof base outline. When you have determined the last point, right-click and the roof "closes" automatically. The "Points" command can be used as an alternative for the "Polyline" command. Polyline: Point the mouse on the polyline you have already drawn to determine the roof outline. The "Polyline" command can be used as an alternative for the "Points" command. Outline Editing: This command group enables moving, adding or deleting a point of the roof outline, allowing the user to modify the roof without having to create it from the beginning. This command group is activated after a roof is drawn and is used primarily in combination with the Change Roof command, which shall be described later. In detail, this command group consists of the following modifications: Move Point: Allows the user to move a vertex of the roof outline. To specify the vertex you want to move, all you have to do is point the mouse on a point near the vertex, drag it and watch the vertex move correspondingly. Add Point: Allows the user to define a new vertex of the roof outline. Select the side where you want the new vertex to be located and specify the new vertex position. Delete Point: Allows the user to delete a vertex of the roof outline. Inclination (): Enter the roof inclination in degrees. Inclination (%): Enter the roof inclination in percentage.
290
4M
Double Inclination: Select this option if you want the roof to have double inclination. In this case, specify the second inclination and the height of separation. By default, the second inclination value is 50 and the separation height value is 1.00. These values become active upon selecting the Double Inclination checkbox and can be modified from the Roof dialog box. Sections on vertical sides: This option enables the creation of sections on the vertical sides of the roof, in order to create complex forms. (This command is presented in detail further down.) Height: Enter the roof height in meters (m). When you have specified one of the above values, the other is calculated automatically (the values can be seen on the screen). Elevation: Enter the roof distance (in m) from the floor level of the current floor. Width: Enter the roof thickness in meters (m). Roof thickness helps better imaging of the drawings (e.g. cross sections). Extension: Determine how much the roof protrudes in meters (m) from the specified outline, which is usually the propping outline. Connection with Roofs: When you want to insert two or more roofs which intersect on the plan view, these roofs are automatically connected so that the correct effect is created on the plan view as well as in 3D display. The same applies in the case of a skylight on a roof. Connection with Walls: This option enables the walls to be raised up to the roof. Upon inserting the roof, select Connection with Walls to raise the 3 walls up to the roof. Then, the following window appears, where, pressing New Connection, you can select the roof and the walls you want to connect. You are prompted to select the roof first and then the walls you want to raise up to the roof, one by one. Then, press Enter; the Connection with Walls dialog box appears, updated with the relative wall properties. Finally, pressing OK, you return to the Roof dialog box and, pressing OK again, you can see the walls raising and their connection with the roof.
Skylight: This option allows the insertion of an Inclined or Vertical with walls skylight as well as the definition of its properties. This command operates as follows: In the Roof dialog box, select the desired skylight type (inclined or vertical with walls) in the Skylight field. Then, select Properties and the following dialog box appears:
progeCAD Architecture
291
This window enables specifying the distance from the roof, the properties of the skylight walls (facade length, facade height, wall width and colors) as well as the other properties of the roof (type, inclination, height, thickness, colors and draw). Apart from the above properties, the user can specify the properties of the skylight opening through the Opening Attributes option. Pressing this button displays the skylight opening attributes, which can be modified in the following window which is similar to the window described in AutoBLD>Opening>Window:
292
4M
Hatch: Select the hatch type of the roof. Press <Enter> on the [Hatch] button to view the respective menu from where you may select the desired hatch. Each hatch uses a scale in order to be printed correctly. This scale is user-defined. It should be mentioned that there is a switch available for inactivating the hatch, in case that the user wants to process a lighter drawing. Example: Draw an isoclinal roof for the following ground plan:
If you choose to define the roof outline using points, click the "Points" button. Enter the outline points as shown in the picture of the next page.
progeCAD Architecture
293
After entering the last point (or, in case you have selected "Polyline", after closing the polyline), right-click to view the "Roof" dialog box. Click "OK" and see the isoclinal roof (with its ridges) being drawn:
Using the "Hide" command, you can hide everything that is under the roof, so that it can be better viewed. You can also view the roof in 3D:
294
4M
In the above example, the roof height was calculated automatically based on the initial default value of the inclination (25). Of course, the user can change the inclination or enter directly the desired roof height. For every change of either the height or inclination, the program calculates the other value (inclination or height) automatically. The roof parameters include its color (in 2D or 3D) and its hatch as well. The following picture shows a roof with hatch (note that the two roof-shades are hatched differently from the main roof):
Note: The use of hatch makes the drawing more complicated and, therefore, the file size increases accordingly. Also, the time needed to create the hatch depends on the number of the roof sides and the complexity of the hatch type (sometimes the creation of the hatch may take a few minutes). For all these reasons, it is suggested that the hatching of the roof should be the last task.
progeCAD Architecture
295
A very useful feature of the program is that it allows the dynamic management of the roof, that is the ability to modify one or more of the above mentioned parameters and directly monitor the result. This feature is provided through the "Modify Roof" command, which activates again the roof dialog box that contains all the values associated with a particular roof. For example, run the "Modify Roof" command, select a specific roof and then you can modify the roof height in the appearing dialog window. Click "OK" and see how the roof changes. This way, you can modify any parameter and view the results. The ability to change the inclination of one or more sides of the roof is very helpful as it makes it easy to create practically any roof type in minimum time. More specifically, a roof can be modified in the following ways: Move Point: Allows the user to move the vertex of the roof outline. To specify the vertex you want to move, all you have to do is to place the cursor on a point near the vertex, drag it and watch the vertex move. Add Point: Allows the user to define a new vertex of the roof outline. Select the side where you want the new vertex to be located and specify the vertex position. Delete Point: Deletes a vertex of the roof outline. Inclination: Allows the user to modify the inclination of one or more sides of the roof. To change the angle, you must first specify the new inclination [between 0 degrees (for horizontal parts of the roof) and 90 degrees (for vertical parts)] and then point on the sides you want to change. Please note that no section is drawn when the inclination is set at 90 degrees. Example: Make the following modifications to the roof drawn in the previous example: Change the height (from the one initially calculated to 1.5 m), extend the entire roof by 0.40m and especially by 1m on the right side, the inclination of which should also be changed into vertical (90 degrees). Select "Modify Roof"; in the appearing dialog box, enter the new values for height (1.5 m) and extension (0.40 m) and click "OK":
296
4M
These first changes can already be viewed on the screen. Select "Modify Roof" again or simply right-click (which repeats the last command) to re-open the dialog box and choose "Inclination". Provide the new inclination (90) in the command line, as prompted. Then, click the side of the roof which inclination you want to change and watch the inclination changing into 90 degrees (the user can see the inclinations of all sides at anytime, as they are automatically displayed in the center of the side). Click "OK" and see how the roof is changed (the change will be more evident if you activate the 3D view). As you will see below, the "gap" can be "filled" with the "Raise Wall" command. To complete the example, you must move the right side (as shown in the ground plan) by 1m to the right. For this purpose, select the "Move" command and, using the snap points, grab the roof edge and move it accordingly:
When you have moved the first endpoint to its final position, the drawing will appear as follows:
progeCAD Architecture
297
Follow the same procedure with the lower right endpoint and then right-click to view the dialog box. Click "OK" to confirm the action. You will see that the right side of the roof has been extended to the desired point: An additional feature of the program is that it allows the user to specify points and inclinations on an existing roof and automatically view the corresponding altitudes and inclinations on the ground plan. Select "Roof Height Dimension" or "Roof Inclination Dimension" from the same command group. You will be prompted to specify the roof and enter the desired points. These points will be indicated on screen with the appropriate symbols. This action should take place only if the roof has reached its final form. Besides, the Details of the Roof view option enables the user to enhance the view file with some drawing details. Finally, if there are any "gaps" created, you can extend a wall to the roof edge. In the above example, you can fill the gap with the "Raise Walls" command. You will be prompted to point the roof to which the wall will be attached and the wall itself. To familiarize yourself with the program faster, you can continue modifying the roof of the above example, using the other commands as well.
298
4M
Select "Isoclinal Roof" and provide the outline, following the known procedure. The following roof will be created:
Change the angles of the four sides shown in the picture to 90 degrees to create the desired shade. In the above example, the roof was drawn as one part, because the two parts have equal width. If the width is different, you should create two separate parts. In this case, draw the first part as an isoclinal roof and change the inclinations; then, do the same for the second part.
progeCAD Architecture
299
Roof with support sides of different height: This type of roof (shown in the picture) is drawn as two parts, like two single-sided roofs. Roof as a simple geometric shape: You can convert a roof from an object into a geometrical shape with lines (or 3D faces), if this helps in further editing the drawing. The conversion of a roof into a number of simple lines is performed using the CAD "Explode" command. Of course, this manual cannot describe all possible roof types. However, as proved in practice, the program facilitates drawing even the most special roof types. As long as the user has understood and become familiar with all the features mentioned in the previous sections, he/she will be able to deal with practically any case.
6.1.3 Chimney
Selecting AutoBLD>Special Elements Drawing>Chimney or typing "chimney" in the command line, you can insert a chimney in the drawing with the desired properties. Upon selecting this command, the following dialog box appears, where you can select the chimney type (rectangular or circular) and specify its desired properties (width, thickness, height, hat attributes) as well as the level where it should be located. Upon creating the chimney, you can modify it and change any of its attributes you want. This can be done either by double clicking on the chimney to be modified or by right-clicking on the chimney and selecting Properties from the pop-up menu or by selecting the chimney and pressing the Modify Entities option in the Property Panel. Any way the user chooses, executing one of the above displays the Chimney dialog box again, where you can modify the chimney properties.
300
4M
6.2 Staircases
6.2.1 General
Select "Special Elements" in the AutoBLD menu and then choose "Staircases". A slide screen will then appear, where each slide corresponds to a specific staircase type.
These are standard staircase types, except for the last one (free-route staircase), with which the user can create any type of staircase. Depending on the selected staircase type (by double-clicking the corresponding slide or by left-clicking once and then clicking "OK"), a dialog box will appear with the parameters corresponding to the particular staircase. After inserting the correct values for each of these parameters and then clicking "Calculations" and "OK" to exit, you can see the staircase being created on the ground plan. As expected, the required parameters for each staircase type are different. In general, these parameters involve the staircase "points", which are the characteristic points of the staircase route and are differently standardized for every staircase type as well as other parameters such as height, elevation, width etc, which are common in all types. When you have specified the appropriate "points" of the staircase, directly on the ground plan (where the respective option of the staircase dialog box automatically leads), and confirmed that the values of the other parameters are correct, you can click the "Calculations" button to view the results for the various calculated staircase parameters (the tread and the riser of the step, the number of steps etc). At the bottom left part of the window there are indications for the compliance of the result values with the General Building Code (GBC) regulations. If the boxes are ticked, the corresponding result complies with the GBC. If a box is empty, the particular value does not comply with the code. However, you can still construct the staircase if you want to and if it is technically possible (otherwise, a relevant message appears). In any case, you can change any parameter, in order for the program to re-calculate and provide results that comply with the code. Please note that, besides the parameters you have initially set, you can also change the number of steps, by entering the desired number in the "No of Desired Steps" field and clicking the "Calculations" button. The program will then perform the calculations; based on the number of steps you have specified. If you want to cancel the desired number of steps, you have to enter "0" in the corresponding field and click the "Calculations" button again.
progeCAD Architecture
301
The "Begin Symbol End Symbol" and "Stairs Section" commands are common in all staircase dialog boxes. Select this command to view the symbols window. After the staircase is calculated, these symbols will be placed at its starting and ending points. In the staircase cross section menu, you can specify which part will be visible and which not and select the type of the line that will be used for drawing the invisible part. The cross section line is the one that separates the visible from the invisible part. A very important feature, in case you want to re-draw a staircase of the same type, is that you do not need to delete the previous one and repeat the procedure, but you can simply change the parameters and dynamically modify the staircase. This is carried out through the "Modify Staircase" option, which is very useful for every change or even tests that need to be performed, until you manage to draw the desired staircase. Example: Draw a 2.90 m high circular staircase, with 1.20 m outer and 0.20 m inner radius. Assume that the staircase begins horizontally and turns by 3/4 (i.e. 270o) clockwise. Select "Staircase" to view the main window with the standard staircase types and choose "Circular Staircase". The circular staircase dialog box will appear:
302
4M
Click "Center" to enter the screen and specify the characteristic points of the staircase. The first point you are prompted to specify (see command line) is the center of the staircase. Then you are prompted to provide the length of the big radius, which can be also defined using the mouse (and monitoring the length on the screen) or typing @ x,y, making sure that the line you see corresponds to the starting side of the staircase. Then enter the length of the small radius. Finally, enter the side where the staircase ends, namely the arc between the starting side and the ending side. When you have finished entering all the data mentioned above, you are transferred again in the circular staircase dialog box. Now, if you click "Calculation" you will see the number of steps and the 3 basic geometrical characteristics of the staircase (tread, riser and 2h+b) at the bottom left part of the screen. Note that the calculated values are within the General Building Code limits, as indicated by the three ticked boxes.
After making sure that all values in the dialog box are correct (height, rotation etc), click "OK" to see the staircase being drawn.
progeCAD Architecture
303
Through the "3D View" command, you can view the staircase in 3D (e.g. from a viewing angle of 45o).
Any possible modifications can be carried out easily and quickly. For example, if you want the staircase to have 16 steps and to turn to the opposite direction, all you have to do is run the "Modify Staircase" command, point the mouse on the staircase (as seen in 3D) and enter the appropriate values in the dialog box that will appear (for the rotation, you have to select the lower field ("Counterclockwise"). Finally, do not forget to click the "Calculation" button in order for the program to recalculate the staircase with the new values:
304
4M
As you can see, with the new data, "Tread" does not comply with the GBC provisions, but assume that you want to build the staircase anyway. If you click "OK", the new staircase will be drawn (in the same viewing angle).
You can try all possible ways of changing the staircase [radii, arc, width, number of steps (note that in order to cancel the desired number of steps, you must first delete the corresponding value and then re-calculate) etc], in order to become familiar with the features of real-time dynamic staircase drawing.
As shown in this screen, the upper part regards the left outline of the staircase whereas the bottom part concerns the right outline. In each one of them, there are 3 main options available: "No", "Low Wall" and "Rail" respectively. By default, buttons for both outlines are in the "No" position, while the items concerning the parapet or the rail dimensions are activated when the option "Low Wall" or "Rail", respectively, is selected. More specifically: The parapet definition is based on the following data (values are in m): Elevation: The level where the low wall starts in relation to the staircase Height: The low wall height Width: The low wall width (thickness) The rail definition is based on the following data (all dimensions are in m as well): Width: The rail width. Thickness: The rail thickness. Type: Click the key "Type" to select the rail pattern (e.g. circular, square etc cross section) from the appearing screen with slides. Distance: It concerns the spacing between rails and it can be defined as desired. The above two cases can be associated with a handrail. Regarding rails in particular, handrail exists in any case. Provided there is a handrail, select the checkbox (with an "x" mark) and determine the elevation, height and width (in m). Example: Suppose you want to add parapet at the inner side and circular cross section rails at the outer side of the circular staircase drawn above. Let the parapet be 0.7 m high, the handrail 0.1 m wide and the rail 0.85 m high while the spacing between rails will be 0.20 m. Run the "Modify Staircase" command and select the circular staircase drawn in the previous example to enter the dialog screen carrying the parameters of the particular staircase. Select "Rails" within this window to enter a new dialog screen where you should provide the appropriate values: 306 4M
Click "OK" at the bottom to return to the previous dialog screen where you are prompted to perform calculations once more and then click "OK" to exit. You can then see the staircase being drawn. If the viewing angle is set at 225 (within "Viewing Parameters"), the staircase is displayed as in the following picture:
progeCAD Architecture
307
Apart from rails, the additional elements include the staircase colors as well as the materials used for its construction. This selection is carried out through the "3D Color" and "2D Color" options, which function similarly to everything mentioned in the previous chapter regarding walls. Therefore, if, for example, 2D Color is selected, the adjacent window appears, presenting all the alternative colors for the user to select the desired one. Once "3D Color" is selected, a window appears displaying colors that correspond to particular materials, which you can select if you are interested in running Photorealism through PhotoIDEA. Finally, in case you want to "fill" the section under the staircase, you should insert the same values in the fields "thickness" and "height".
By pressing the Cross section and Location key, a new dialog appears prompting for the combination of the cross section and the location of the staircase. Then, by selecting a certain combination (the program displays a message if this combination is invalid) and returning to the previous dialog, the slides of the Rung and Staircase Beam have been defined. Then, by pressing the keys Rung and Staircase Beam below the slides, you can choose the right type of those parameters from the alternative options (see the following example for the Rung).
308
4M
After having defined all the values for the parameters of the staircase, you can create the desired staircase, according to the instructions given previously for the concrete staircase. Once the staircase is created, you can use the Staircase Table command in order to append a table with all the details of this staircase.
progeCAD Architecture
309
The determinant features of such a staircase are its Definition Points, which have to be provided. When you click the "Point Definition" key, the program prompts for the following characteristic points of the staircase: the starting point of the staircase (in the middle of the step) the ending point of the staircase (in the middle of the step) Regarding the elevation, the height, the width and the thickness of the staircase, the values inserted in the respective fields shall be taken into account. Straight Staircase with Landing: When the "Straight Staircase with Landing" option is selected, its features are displayed in the respective dialog screen that appears:
The determinant features of such a staircase are its Definition Points, which need to be provided. When you click the "Point Definition" key, the program prompts for the following characteristic points of the staircase: the starting point of the staircase (in the middle of the step) the ending point of the staircase (in the middle of the step) Regarding the elevation, the height, the width, the number of steps prior to the landing, the landing length and the thickness of the staircase, the values inserted in the respective fields shall be taken into account.
310
4M
Staircase with Landing and 90 Angle: In this case the following dialog screen appears:
the starting point of the staircase (from the outer side) the staircase endpoint at the landing corner (from the outer side) the ending point of the staircase (from the outer side) Regarding the other items, the values inserted at the bottom are taken into account. Staircase with Landing and 180 Angle: Everything mentioned above applies here as well. The only difference is that here the user should determine 4, instead of 3, endpoints. In this case, the appearing dialog screen is the following:
progeCAD Architecture
311
Staircase with Reformation and 90 Angle: The same actions performed in the case of a straight staircase with landing and 90 angle apply here as well while the dialog screen is the following:
Staircase with Reformation and 180 Angle: The same actions performed in the case of a straight staircase with landing and 180 angle apply here as well.
312
4M
Staircase with Reformation and 270Angle: The applying instructions are similar to those described above.
Circular Staircase: It concerns the staircase described in detail and with an example in the first section of this chapter.
progeCAD Architecture
313
314
4M
Finally, select the "Landing" option to determine along the ascension line as many landings as desired. In particular, running this command triggers the following dialog box to appear, where you can add, modify or delete the staircase landings. The landing definition includes its length, which corresponds to a section of the ascension line, as well as the number of steps prior to the landing (start counting from the last landing or the staircase starting point). Example 1: Draw the staircase shown in the following figure. Its width equals to 1.20 m.
First of all, define the outline (let it be the outer one), by a polyline, providing the 3 terminal points, as shown in the figure. Run the "Copy Ascension Line" or the progeCAD "Offset" command (providing distance equal to 0.6, half the width) to copy the outer outline shifted by 0.6, so that an ascension line is created. Run the above command once more (retain 0.6) to create the inner outline of the staircase as well.
progeCAD Architecture
315
The only thing left is to select "Smooth Ascension Line" providing a radius equal to 0.6 m.
Now you are ready to select to draw a free-route staircase from the menu. Select "Dimension Definition" in the appearing dialog screen and click the ascension line as well as the outlines, exactly as required. In the dialog window, which appears on the screen once more, select "Calculations" and make sure that the calculated steps are 19 and the lengths corresponding to the tread and riser of the steps are 0.290 and 0.160, respectively. Click "OK" to see the staircase being created on the ground plan, exactly as desired, while in a 3D image it is displayed as in the bottom left figure:
316
4M
Suppose you want to add a landing 1m long starting after the 8th step. All you have to do is select "Landings", insert values 8 and 1 at the bottom right side (and click "Add" right after so that it is saved in the landing table) and finally click "OK". You can then see the staircase being modified accordingly. Apparently you can work similarly to create any possible version out of the above case, like the one displayed on the top right side (pay attention so that there is always one, even a very small, angled section in the inner outline). Example 2: Draw the staircase shown below:
progeCAD Architecture
317
Start to draw the outer outline with Polyline and form the ascension line through "Offset" (by 0.6). Continue with the inner outline (lantern) and create the 3 characteristic lines of the staircase. Afterwards, smooth the ascension line (with radius 0.6) as well as the inner outline (with radius 0.1). If you select "Draw free-route staircase", define the 3 characteristic lines and select "Calculations", you will see that there are 15 steps calculated in the dialog window. Finally, clicking "OK" triggers the creation of the staircase on the ground plan. However, the staircase looks much more impressive in the 3D image. Studying the two above examples, the user is able to comprehend the utilities provided by the program concerning the creation of any other type of staircase. Finally, in the AutoBLD->Draw Special Elements menu, the Analysis to Outlines command enables the user to see the outlines that constitute the staircase.
6.3 Rails
If "Rails" is selected, the following dialog box appears including all the parameters, which define the rails.
More specifically, these parameters regard: Dimensions of the low wall (Elevation, Height, Thickness), on which the rails are placed, as well as the 2D and 3D Color of the low wall. Rail Dimensions (Height, Thickness, Motif Length) as well as its 2D and 3D Color. Width and Thickness of the Handrail, which you may want to place on top of the rails.
318
4M
Provided these parameters are defined, you can select a Rail "Drawing", through the corresponding option, from the existing rails which will appear in the respective slide group. Alternatively, you can select one of the "User's" Rails, which are included in the Rail Library and can be easily created by the user. Note that, in order to create a rail, you have to select the "Rail Library" option first. Then you can draw the Rail by either specifying Points or clicking a polyline (previously drawn) and the selected rail (along with the parapet) is formed on the screen. Any later modification is possible through the "Modify Rail" option. Example: Create a rail on a parapet, like the one shown in the following figure. Keep in mind that the rail of the figure is 0.70 m high, the parapet is 0.30 m high and the spacing between rails is 0.25 m.
Then enter the ground plan (of course, it is also possible in the 3D drawing) and draw the rail as shown below:
progeCAD Architecture
319
Users Rails
Select this option to enter the User's Rails Library, which corresponds to a screen with slides that are initially blank.
If you select one of the slides and click the "Create" key on the right, the following dialog box appears: In order to run the commands included in this dialog box, you should have already drawn a rail section, according to some specific rules which will be also described in a simple example below. The displayed sections, the rail profile, can be lines or polylines, which will later obtain volume (thickness) with the help of the program.
320
4M
Example 1: Suppose you want to create the rail type shown in the following figure:
First of all, use lines or polylines to draw the rail pattern (on the ground plan). Then, select "Object Definition" to define the desired width and thickness and select the lines which will be drawn following these parameters. Then: Select "Icon Slide Screen" to determine in the appearing window what you want included in the rail slide. Select "Solid Object" to have the rail converted into a three-dimensional drawing. Select "Icon Save Slide" to create the rail slide. Select "Insertion Point" and provide the point in relation to which the rail should be inserted in the drawing. Select "Pattern length" and show on the screen the length of the prototype rail you drew or just type it. Select "Pattern height" and show on the screen the height of the prototype rail you drew or just type it. Select "Pattern thickness" and show on the screen the thickness of the prototype rail you drew or just type it. Select "Save Drawing" and the on-screen drawing is saved in the "User's Rails" library, provided of course it has been selected. Select "Close" to exit the dialog screen. Example 2: Suppose you want to create a more complex rail, which elements are not necessarily on the same level, as in the previous example. More specifically, suppose you want to create a rail like the one shown in the adjacent figure (or any other similar to this or even a much more complex one). First of all, run the "Pline" command to create the "elementary" shape, e.g. the one displayed on the bottom left.
progeCAD Architecture
321
Select "Rail Library" and "Create" in the "User's Rails" window. During definition, select the above pline. Press <Esc>, to exit the user's rail creation menu. Run the "extrude" command and select the above "pline", providing 0.05 as height of extension and 0.0 as extension taper angle. Then run the "pline rotate3D" and it will be displayed on the ground plan as a line (its projection). You can now copy this element (through simple copy"copy" or multiple copy-"array"), so that the repeated rail unit is created, by joining them with lines as shown in the following figure. Run again the commands "Rail Library" and "Create" in the "User's Rails" window. During definition, select only the 4 lines (line in the adjacent figure), but in the "Solid Object" window select the entire figure. Carry on running the other commands, exactly as described in the previous example, until the rail creation procedure is completed.
Select the option "Plane Definition" to specify on the ground plan the first and the second point of the axis in relation to which the gable will be defined. Once these two points are specified, the program automatically shows the view corresponding to the determined axis. On the side view, the "Outline>Outer" command displays the following message in the command line: outline type/polygonal (p)/circular (c), where typing p prompts you to specify the 1st point or to draw the polyline of the desired shape. The latter option enables the user to create complex polygonal shapes as well as shapes including straight lines and arches.
322
4M
This way, you can define the desired gable. In the view, run the "Outline" command to define the desired gable. Similar to "Slabs", the command "z axis" converts the thickness from positive to negative; in other words, the gable is mirrored with regard to the axis which was initially determined. Any possible change of an existing vertical element can be implemented within the respective dialog which appears through the command modification of the vertical element or by double clicking on the element and selecting Properties. Example: Suppose you want to create the gable (in view) which is shown in the following figure: Select "Vertical Element-Gable" and click "Plane Definition" in the appearing window. On the ground plan specify the first and the second point of the axis in relation to which the gable will be defined. In the view that is automatically displayed after the 2 axis points are provided, select the "Outer Outline" option to determine the outline type (in this particular case, it is polygonal - P) and draw the Gable outline, exactly as shown in the above figure. Then select the created Gable through the "Modify Vertical Element" command to return to the view of the Gable for which you should specify a hole (with circular outline - C) by providing the centre and the radius. Accept the recommended number of sections (for circle simulation), press <Enter>, <Enter> and <OK> and look at the final form of the Gable in view. Select "3D View" for better monitoring and run the "Move" command to place the Gable in the desired position.
6.5 Ramp
The "Ramp" option supports drawing of inclined surfaces and the following dialog box appears when it is selected:
Define the ramp points using the relevant button on the top for a ramp to be created according to the inclination and dimensions provided in the corresponding fields. More specifically, 3 points are required. The first point is one of the lower endpoints of the ramp; the second one is the respective upper endpoint while the second along with the third point specify the upper horizontal side of the ramp. Any possible modification (e.g. of the inclination) of a drawn ramp can be easily performed through the respective dialog, which appears through the "Modify Ramp" command or even by double-clicking on the ramp and selecting Properties.
progeCAD Architecture
323
Example: Suppose you want to draw a ramp that is 5 m long, 2 m wide and 0.6 m high. Run the "Ramp" command. In the appearing dialog screen, click "Points Definition" and provide the starting point. Then, type in the command line @5.0<0 (for length) and finally type @2.0<270 (for width). After that, the "Ramp" dialog box appears again. There you should set the desired height at 0.6 m and the inclination will be automatically calculated (in % and in degrees), since both the height and the length of the ramp have been determined. If you wish, you can modify the ramp width, which will be increased towards the side, which was initially defined. Free-Route Ramp: It can be defined following the method applying in free-route staircases. In particular, first specify the polyline corresponding to the ascension line and then run the "Copy ascension line" command, found in the management menu for staircase commands, to define the outlines that determine the boundaries of the ramp. Then, if you select the option "Free-Route Ramp" and type "Outlines" in the command line, you will be prompted for the ascension line first and then the outer outlines 1 and 2.
324
4M
7.1 Dimensioning
This option can be used for the dimensioning of the project ground plans. It includes 5 sub-options; the horizontal, the vertical as well as the slope dimensioning, the wall dimensioning and the dimensioning switch. The use of the "Wall Dimensioning" command is recommended because it offers the advantage of automatic update after each drawing modification. The rest options should be used on the final drawings. Finally, the option modification helps the user to modify some of the dimension attributes, such as the text height, the arrow type etc. In the following sections, the above commands are described in brief, in the order they appear in the menu.
progeCAD Archetecture
325
326
4M
7.1.7 Modify
This command serves to modify the characteristics of a certain dimension. First, you must select the dimension you want to modify and then you just have to make the changes on the following respective dialog.
progeCAD Archetecture
327
Then, after you have selected the category, select the location where you want to insert the symbol or the drawing, within the relevant category. Use the right and the left arrow to move to the various symbol locations. You can see the serial number of the symbol (on the left) and the corresponding screen (on the right). Move to a blank location and use the arrows appearing below to enter the new symbol. More specifically: Click the button "Select Object" to select the drawing (object) you want to insert. Select the object using the mouse exactly as you select an object to be deleted, moved etc. As soon as you select the object and left click, the above window appears again automatically (dialog box). Use the insertion point to define the base point (reference point), according to which the drawing will be inserted whenever you call it from the library. Click the button "Slide Screen" to enter the drawing in order to determine the "image" of the object that you want to appear on the slides (screens) of the libraries. The definition is easy to carry out through a window (just like zoom). After the image definition, the above window (dialog box) appears again. Select the "Save Slide" option to update the corresponding slide. In the field Symbol name type the name and then select Enter to save the name. Provided that you have run the commands mentioned above and most of all you have selected an object, select "Save Drawing" (which is automatically activated - it gets black - when an object is selected) and the object is finally saved into a file.
328
4M
Example: Insert in the 3D libraries, in the subcategory "Office Furniture", the adjacent armchair drawn in progeCAD (or loaded from an existing drawing). Enter the "Drawings Library" and select the subcategory "Office Furniture" at the top of the appearing dialog screen:
Go to "Location of Symbol" 9 (use the sliding keys or type the value 9) and you can see that there is no symbol in the location 9 (the slide is blank). Having on your screen the three-dimensional drawing on one side and the dialog screen on the other, use one by one the commands - buttons of the dialog screen, following the procedure described above. With the command "Save Slide" the program prompts the user to replace the previous symbol (if there is one, of course) and then the following screen appears:
Providing the rest of the information as well (insertion point, symbol name etc) the new symbol is saved with all its data and from this point on you can select it and insert it in the drawing.
progeCAD Archetecture
329
7.3.2 3D View
This command provides a quick solution for three-dimensional monitoring of the ground plan of the current floor, with the viewing angles previously determined in the "Viewing Parameters". For better monitoring you can hide the "back" lines through the command "HIDE", or even shade them through the command "SHADE". This is possible by typing the relative command in the progeCAD command line.
330
4M
An important advantage of the application is the automatic update of the side views upon any change applied by the user on the plan view. Selecting Project Drawings>Side View, you are prompted to specify the desired side view. Upon specifying the second point, the "Should the Side View Layers be created?" message appears. Selecting Accept, you are prompted to specify a name for the side view which you should type in the command line. Thus, an icon with the side view name is created on the plan view; you can open the side view at any time, in order to modify it, by just double-clicking that icon. Then, if you wish to return to the plan view, select AutoBLD>Plan View or type plan in the command line. You can see that any change of the model affects directly the created side views. That is, there is direct and dynamic relation between the plan view and the side views of the project. The same apply in creating and editing cross sections, as it is mentioned further down. Note: What you see on the screen is saved in a separate drawing within the bld folder of the project. For this operation it is necessary to include the .dwg file in a .bld type of folder and the project path should not be too long.
progeCAD Archetecture
331
Cross section: You are requested to successively enter the intersection line (by defining two successive points that determine this line) and finally the point towards which viewing takes place (viewing point). This is clarified in the following example:
The above procedure results in the following cross section that appears on your screen, while at the same time the program prompts you to "Create File for Section".
An important advantage of the application, in this case as well, is the automatic update of the cross sections upon any change applied by the user on the plan view. Selecting Project Drawings>Cross Section, you are prompted to specify the desired cross section. Upon specifying the second point, the "Should the Cross Section Layers be created?" message appears. Selecting Accept, you are prompted to specify a name for the cross section which you should type in the command line. Thus, an icon with the cross section name is created on the plan view; you can open the cross section at any time, in order to modify it, by just double-clicking that icon. Then, if you wish to return to the plan view, select AutoBLD>Plan View or type plan in the command line. You can see that any change of the model affects directly the created cross sections. That is, there is direct and dynamic relation between the plan view and the cross sections of the project. 332 4M
In this way, the user can easily manage the plan view, the side views and the cross sections of his/her project through an organic structure of the plan view. Note: When a cross section is created and appears on the screen, it is also saved in a separate file as a cross section drawing. Undo Cross Section: With this command you can cancel the cross section that was created with the command "Cross Section". If you select another command, like "Ground Plan", the cross section will be cancelled automatically. Screen Drawing: The command "Screen Drawing" enables you to save any drawing (e.g. a ground plan, an axonometric etc), which is displayed on the screen at the time, in a file (DWG). It is different from the command "Save as" because it has been designed for attaining the greatest possible economy in the file size (it does not save anything else but the entities appearing on the screen). It is a very useful command and it is mainly used for the creation of the final drawings to be printed, with the advantage of their small size even if they derive from a DWG project file with significant size. The procedure is simple: After selecting the command, the program prompts you to select the section of the drawing appearing on the screen that you want to save in a file. Of course, you can select the whole drawing (by typing "ALL" in the command line) or any section, through the "select" command. After completing the selection, the program asks you to wait for a while and then asks for the name of the file into which you want to save the drawing. When you enter the file name, the program creates the file in the directory BLD of the project. If the entered name already exists, the program asks if you want to replace the older file. Then you are transferred automatically within the created drawing, so as to view and edit it (if you want). In order to return to the drawing of the project, in which you were before the execution of the command, you should Open the file of your project or select the project again, by running "Open Project". This way you return to the point you were before the creation of the screen drawing. Note: Instead of the above command Screen Drawing", the user can alternatively use the command "WBLOCK". In particular, type "WBLOCK" in the command line and the filename with which you want to save the drawing, in the field "File Name" in the appearing window. Then, in the prompt that appears in the command line "Block Name" press <Enter>, in the prompt "Insertion Point" insert 0,0 and in the prompt "Select Objects" select the drawing (or the drawing section) you want to transfer into the file. The drawing is saved, but it disappears from the screen. To bring it back on the screen, you should run "undo" (e.g. by typing "U" in the command line and pressing <Enter>). View File: Run this command to create the side view of the drawing and the active window is saved in a separate drawing as a view drawing, after the name you specify. Upon running this command, you are prompted for the two points required to create the side view. The drawing is created and you are prompted for the file name (e.g. View1) with which you want the relevant view drawing to be saved. Specifying the name opens this drawing. To return to the original, select it from Window. Cross Section File: Run this command to create the cross section of the drawing and the active window is saved in a separate drawing as a cross section drawing, after the name you specify. Upon running this command, you are prompted for the two points required to create the cross section. The drawing is created and you are prompted for the file name (e.g. Section1) with which you want the relevant cross section drawing to be saved. Specifying the name opens this drawing. To return to the original, select it from Window. progeCAD Archetecture 333
A basic advantage of this command is that it highlights the intersected elements from the projected ones with different color (line thickness) in the created file. Axonometric: This command provides three-dimensional monitoring of the whole building (for all floors), with the given viewing angles as they have been selected in "Viewing Parameters". Regarding the creation of an axonometric file, what is mentioned above for the views and the cross sections apply too.
Cross Section Hatch Attributes: This command allows you to define different types of hatches on a cross section drawing. As shown on the command dialog box, a hatch attribute with its scale and angle corresponds to every type of building element.
334
4M
The user can easily select the hatch attribute he prefers for each type of building element by pressing the Selection key. Then a number of slides will appear on the hatch selection window. The Previous and Next keys serve for browsing to previous or next pages within the nine pages of slides, while the Accept key selects the highlighted hatch attribute.
progeCAD Archetecture
335
Elevation Materials-Colors: This command allows you to assign a color to every real material of the building view. The term colors refers to the colors of the lines on the view. The colors-materials correspondence is given automatically by the command 3D Color used for Photorealism for each building element. For any change on the existing correspondence, you can use the options given on the lower side of this window. First you should select the line that you want to change and then write the new name of the material (or color of the view). By pressing the Reset Materials or Reset Colors keys, all materials or colors are deleted.
Material Table: Having defined the Materials-Colors correspondence described in the previous paragraph, this command permits you to locate on the view drawing pointer lines for each material, as well as the overall table of materials. More specifically, this command asks you to select an edge (corresponding to a building element and a certain material), then the first (ending) point of the pointer line (the ending point) and finally the second point of the line (the starting one with a serial number indication, automatically created). This procedure is repeated for the various materials-elements of the building.
336
4M
Then, by clicking on the right button of the mouse the program asks if you have finished entering new edges. By selecting Yes the overall table of materials is located on the right-upper side.
Perspective: The option "Perspective" in the "Project Drawings" leads to 4 suboptions, "Building", "Floor (Level)", "Building in Cross Section" and "Floor in Cross Section", respectively. In case of a building Perspective, you can see the perspective of the whole building from any side and height. The perspectives in cross section are used in case of inner perspectives. The way of function is common in all 4 cases, with the difference that an intersection line is not requested in the first 2 cases. This way, the program initially requires the viewer point as well as the viewing point, which are easily defined with the mouse. Then you are prompted to enter the viewer height and the viewing height (the default values are 1.5 and 1.5 m). In case of perspective in a cross section, "cut" the area between the viewer and the viewing point which may hide what you want to see (e.g. outer or inner walls) by placing properly the vertical to the viewing axis line, which appears automatically and is moved with the mouse: Whatever is found between this line and the viewer is ignored. Finally, provide the lens opening (e.g. 35). After that you can see the perspective which the observer sees on the basis of the data you have specified. In this way you can see the building or any inner space from any side and height. Example 1: If you specify as viewer and viewing points the points 1 and 2 respectively, insert heights 6 and 6 (the program default values), then specify the vertical to the viewing axis line between points 1 and 2 in a way that it does not intersect the building and then provide lens 35 (by typing this value in the command line), the following perspective will appear on the screen:
progeCAD Archetecture
337
Example 2: If you specify as viewer and viewing points the points 1 and 2 respectively, insert the program default initial values, afterwards define the vertical to the viewing axis line between the points 1 and 2 so that it intersects the ground plan interior in the way shown in the figure and then provide lens 17 for greater deformation (by typing this value in the command line), the following perspective will appear on the screen, provided you select "Level Perspective":
And if you select "Building Perspective" the following perspective will appear:
338
4M
Roof Ground Plan: The ground plan of the building roof is created. Save every Drawing in a different file: As mentioned above, in each one of the above cases, right after the relative project drawing is created on the screen, the program prompts you to create a corresponding file (in the disc). If you click "YES", the program asks you to enter a name for the file. The same procedure can be performed through the commands "View File" and "Cross Section File" seen above. The user should note that, for organization and convenience purposes, it is better to follow a certain name designation procedure for the drawings. For example, views can be saved as view1, view2 and so on, or viewA, viewB and so on, cross sections as crossA, crossB etc. You will not have a problem if you assign the same drawing name (e.g. view1) in two different projects since they are stored in the directory BLD of the project, that is, they coexist in different directories. The user should know that when a drawing file is created, the program transfers him/her automatically to the corresponding drawing file, so as to be able to further edit it and print it if he/she wants. For this reason it is recommended to select the "File Creation" option after the users final decision, so as not to waste valuable time for loading and unloading drawings. Moreover, in case that a project drawing is created in a file, the user can open it any time, simply by using the command "OPEN" and entering the drawing name, as defined during its creation (e.g. crossA, view1 etc). In other words, it manages the project drawing as if it were a Dwg file-drawing. You are reminded that during the project drawing editing (views, cross sections etc) the project drawing is just a group of lines, because the objects (e.g. windows, walls etc) have lost their entity and are reduced to simple lines. Nevertheless, the user has important freedom in editing the drawing (symbol selection from libraries, line drawing/deletion, color modification etc). Moreover, the user should also know that, once transferred into a drawing, he/she should necessarily reload the project through the option "PROJECT SELECTION", if he/she wants to return to the project. That is why, each time you enter a project filedrawing, the project is unloaded and the corresponding project drawing is loaded. Hide lines between walls-slabs: Run this command to optimize the result when creating side views and cross sections. When a structural element intersects another, the appearing intermediate line can be hidden on the side view and the cross section, avoiding the effect of a non-uniform result.
progeCAD Archetecture
339
Hide side view and cross section line: Run this command to optimize the result when creating side views and cross sections. Running this command displays a message in the command line which prompts the user to specify the outline of the area, where he/she does not want any line to appear, via points or a polyline. The following image shows the drawing of a wall in side view and a triangular area (polyline) which has been selected so that there will be no line within its boundaries.
Show hiding frames: Running this command shows the hiding frame, that is the frame of the user-defined area, within which no line appears, in side view or cross section. Hide hiding frames: Running this command hides the hiding frame, that is the frame of the user-defined area, within which no line appears, in side view or cross section. For our example, upon running this command, the on-screen image is the one following.
You can see that the desired lines are still hidden; just the hiding frame is not shown. If you want to delete the hiding frame, select Show hiding frames, so that you can easily select the desired hiding frame, and press Delete or run the "Erase" command. The above commands enable the user to edit the side views and the cross sections he/she creates, in order to reach the desired result. The user can easily comprehend the operation of the above commands, as well as their usefulness, in a complex drawing, from which side views and cross sections will be generated.
340
4M
These are a series of additional drawing tools, which have been embodied in the package in order to help the user during drawing. In the top part, the first option included in the PLUS menu of options is Printing Scale, which is used to specify a scale:
progeCAD Architecural
341
Following that, the PLUS menu of options includes general menus of drawing tools, each of which consists of specific tools. These menus are listed below: TEXT TEXT FRAME LINES LAYERS BLOCKS HATCH
8.1 Text
The text menu of options includes a number of tools, especially useful for manipulating text inside drawings. These tools are described next, in the order they appear in the menu. The use of parentheses indicates commands, which are identical with the corresponding commands in progeCAD.
342
4M
8.1.3 Text
The above command enables you to write text directly on your drawing, as soon as you specify the height and the angle of the text, requested by the application. If you press <Enter> twice, the default values of height and angle are maintained, in which case you immediately write the desired text.
Text height <0.2000>: Specify the height of the text in drawing units (Drawing Units). By pressing <Enter>, the default value is assumed. Rotation angle <0>: Specify the angle of writing of the text. nter_line spacing <0.3000>: Specify the distance between lines of text. Maximum line length <2.000>: You set the maximum length of a line of text in drawing units (Drawing units) Text: Write the text. If you want to write in a new line, before you reach the end of the current one, simply press <Enter>.
344
4M
Justify/style/<start point>: Specify the starting point of the text. You can, however, modify the alignment of the text (justify) by pressing J, or the character style, by pressing S. Rotation angle <0>: Specify the angle of writing of the text. Text: Write the text.
progeCAD Architecural
345
Select objects: Select the text you want to edit. New Justification Left/Right/Center/Middle: Specify the new alignment.
346
4M
8.3 Lines
The Lines menu of options includes tools for drawing different types of line, as the ones that appear in the adjacent figure (continuous, dashed, dash-dotted etc.), as well as tools for manipulating lines. These tools are described in the order they appear in the menu.
8.3.1 Continuous
This command is used to draw a continuous line on the current layer. As soon as you select the command, you can start drawing the line using the mouse.
8.3.3 Dashed
This command is used to draw a dashed discontinuous line on the current layer. As soon as you select the command, you can start drawing the line using the mouse.
8.3.8 Double
This command is used to draw an double line on the current layer. As soon as you select the command, you can start drawing the line using the mouse.
progeCAD Architecural
347
8.3.11 Clear
This command clears the drawing from multiple lines (one lying exactly upon the other).
8.4 Layers
The Layers menu of options includes tools for manipulating layers. These tools are described in the order they appear in the menu. Again, the use of parentheses indicates commands in English, which are identical with the corresponding commands in progeCAD.
348
4M
progeCAD Architecural
349
8.5 Blocks
The Blocks menu of options includes tools for manipulating blocks. These tools are described in the order they appear in the menu.
8.5.1 Replace
Using the above command, blocks can be replaced by some other block (replace). The command prompts are: Select objects: Select the blocks you want to replace. Enter the name of new block: Specify the name of the block that will replace the previously selected blocks.
8.5.2 Xplode
The above command explodes the blocks of progeCAD (and the mirrored blocks of progeCAD).
8.5.3 Count
This command can count the number of times a block has been inserted into the drawing. The command prompts are: Enter the name of the block that will be count: Specify the name of the block to count the number of times it has been inserted.
350
4M
9. Examples
In this chapter, several examples, aiming at helping the user understand in practice everything that has been described in the previous chapters, are presented. Initially, section 9.1 provides an analytical description of an example, involving a relatively simple building, but, at the same time, describing each and every step necessary for its completion. Following that, in section 9.2, certain examples originating from real projects, created with ProgeCAD Architecture are demonstrated.
progeCAD Architecture
351
Start drawing the ground plan of the example, illustrated above, by describing all the necessary steps one-by-one: 1. Select "New project, type a name and click "Accept" to begin. 2. Your first task is to select the "Building Definition" command. In the appearing screen, specify Floor 1 Level = 0 and below that, Floor Level = 3. Before you go on, set floor 1 to be the "Current" floor, in order to begin drawing the ground plan of floor 1. 3. You are now ready to draw the ground plan of floor 1, which is the active floor.
Note: The value given on the floor level concerns the specific current level, which means in other words that the height of the walls, slabs etc, starts always from zero.
352
4M
Next, click "OK", in which case the following prompt appears in the command line:
Wall start \ Relative to wall \ Toggle shape <Linear>: prompting you to specify the starting point of the wall. If you left click on the desired point (starting from the top left part, at the end of the wall), the following prompt appears: Wall end \ Relative to wall \ Toggle shape <Linear>: prompting you to specify the 2nd point of the wall being drawn. By left clicking again, the prompt "Side Point" appears, prompting you to specify the side towards which you want the wall to grow. Use the mouse to move accordingly towards the corresponding side. Left click again to view the wall being drawn. Note: The 2nd point can be specified with respect to the 1st. That is, if you want the Wall to have a horizontal length of 5m, specify @5.0<0 (or @5.0,0) in the prompt Wall end \ Relative to wall \ Toggle shape <Linear>:.
progeCAD Architecture
353
The application expects you to continue drawing walls, in which case the end of the previous wall is assumed to be the start of the new one. In order to stop, simply right click. Continue drawing, in this manner, to create the outer walls, until all the straight outer walls are completed.
354
4M
Note: If you selected the secondary option "Outline" in the "WALL" menu, you should specify the corner points of the outline one-by-one, by pressing the left mouse button successively. Having drawn what is illustrated in the figure, if you right clicked (meaning that you had finished), the application would prompt you to specify the side point of the outline. You should then specify an inner point, in order for the wall to grow towards the inside, since the outline was drawn based on the outer dimensions.
By either drawing walls or using the "Outline" option, you have drawn the straight outer walls, as illustrated on the screen.
In order to draw the circular wall which remains, we select Wall>External, so the wall properties dialog appears again. In the Wall Type option (on the upper left side of the dialog) we set the switch on Circular mode. Then the following message appears: Wall start \ Relative to wall \ Toggle shape <Circular>: This message asks for the starting point of the wall. By using the snap tools (Shift + right button to select the endpoint) we select the left edge of the wall. Then the following message appears: 2nd wall point \ Relative to wall \ Toggle shape <Circular>: We define the second point on the line which is located at the same distance from the two parallel walls; the distance is given in that way so that the arc of the wall to be created has the curvature we want. Then the following message appears:
progeCAD Architecture
355
Wall end: We select (by using the left button of the mouse) the left edge of the upper wall. Finally, the message Side Point appears, asking for the side we want the wall to grow. Moving properly the mouse and using the left button, after the click the circular wall is finally created. In case that the circularity of the wall is not the one we want, we can select the circular wall, grab it from the grib in the middle and move it properly as much as needed in order to achieve the desirable curvature. Note: As far as the construction of the circular wall is concerned, we can also proceed as follows: After completing the construction of the latest line wall, regarding the question End wal\Relatively to wall(R)\ Change of shape (T) <Straight>:, we can give the answer (selection) T , so that the shape of the wall is automatically changed from straight to circular.
Wall start \ Relative to wall \ Toggle shape <Linear>: prompting you to specify the starting point of the wall. Suppose corner formed by the outer walls (in the bottom left part). Run either the middle mouse button or <Shift> & <right button>) to snap and then "grab" the corresponding endpoint using the left the following prompt appears: Wall end \ Relative to wall \ Toggle shape <Linear>: prompting you to specify the 2nd point of the inner wall being drawn.
356
4M
Continue drawing and, in order to bring the wall in a vertical position with respect to the opposite (outer) wall, activate "ESNAP", by pressing either the middle mouse button or <Shift>&<right button>, and select "Perpendicular". By pointing to the outer wall (using the left mouse button), the following prompt appears: Enter Side Point: prompting you to specify the side towards which you want the wall to grow. Specify a point towards the corresponding side to view the wall being drawn and its joints being automatically "cleared". Right click to complete the wall, for the time being. Right click again, after that, to repeat the "Inner Wall" command and begin drawing the horizontal inner wall starting from a point of the other inner wall (see the section referring to inner walls and distance, in particular), in order to draw the rest of the inner walls, which results in the ground plan illustrated below.
progeCAD Architecture
357
Click "OK", in which case the following prompt appears in the command line: Select Wall: prompting you to specify the wall that you want to place the window on. Left click, aiming at the outer side of the wall, near its left end. Then, you can see the selected wall displayed in dotted line and the coordinate system transferred to the starting point of the wall closer to the point you selected. To the new prompt: Enter first point: specify the starting point of the window. While placing the starting point of the window, use the value of the distance from the end of the wall, appearing automatically on the top of the screen, as extra help, or specify 0.80 directly to place the starting point at a distance of 0.80 m. Press <Enter> and the following prompt appears: Enter second point:
358
4M
where you should specify the second point of the window. As long as you have specified the length of the window in the "WINDOW PARAMETERS", it is not necessary to specify the second point exactly. You only need to specify a point near the start, towards the side the second point of the window is located. The application will automatically detect the second endpoint. It is noted that this option is useful in the case that you want to draw several identical (having the same dimensions) windows. After the above actions, you can view the window being drawn on the wall.
Additionally, an auxiliary label (containing the geometric parameters) of the window appears, which you can place anywhere you wish, by moving it accordingly and pressing the left mouse button. The window drawn is better viewed using the "3D View" option:
Next, in order to draw the door located on the right side of the window, on the Outer Wall:
progeCAD Architecture
359
Select "Opening"->"Door" and specify the appropriate parameters, as illustrated in the following screenshot:
Click "OK", in which case, the following message appears: Select Wall: prompting you to specify the wall that you want to place the door on. Right click while aiming at the wall. Then, you can view the selected wall displayed in dotted line and the coordinate system transferred to the starting point of the wall closer to the point you selected. To the new prompt: Enter first point: Specify the starting point of the door. While placing the starting point of the door, use the value of the distance from the end of the wall, appearing automatically on the top of the screen, as extra help. By specifying the desired starting point (in the command line, the same way with the window, or simply using the mouse), the following prompt appears: Enter second point: where you should specify the second point of the door. As long as you have specified the length of the door in the "DOOR PARAMETERS", it is not necessary to specify the second point exactly. You only need to specify a point near the start, towards the side that the second point of the door is located. The application will automatically detect the second endpoint. Finally, the following prompt appears: Enter Opening Side:
360
4M
where you can specify the direction towards which the door will open. After the above
actions, you can view the door being drawn on the wall.
Additionally, the auxiliary circular label (containing the geometric parameters) of the door appears, which you can place anywhere you wish, by moving it accordingly and pressing <Enter>. The other openings are drawn in a similar way (sliding windows and doors). The user can practise on its own, drawing several types of doors and windows and also performing several tests and modifications to realise the flexibility of the package. Also we can copy some openings, by using the progeCAD copy command.
9.1.4 Columns
In order to place the column in the corner of the wall, on the right of the door, select the "COLUMN" option in the AutoBLD menu and specify dimensions 30 x 40. Next, click "OK" and the following prompt appears: Enter Insertion Point: prompting you to specify the first endpoint (insertion point) of the column. As soon as you specify it, the "Insertion Angle" is requested. Specify it using OSNAP and setting "Closest Point" to the inner side of the wall, to view the drawn column. Any modification of the column parameters or hatch is possible through the "Modify" option, or though double clicking on the column (with the left button), or by selecting Properties after selecting the column and pressing the right button.
progeCAD Architecture
361
9.1.5 Slab
Before placing the slab, draw a closed polyline, which shape should be identical to the outline of the slab, as well as a closed circle polyline, in the position that the staircase will be placed. Next, in order to place the slab, select the "SLAB" option and then select "Outer Outline" by "Polyline" in the appearing dialog box. Using the mouse, "point to" the earlier drawn outline. Following this, "point to" the hole and finally specify slab level = 0,25 and slab thickness = 0.25, to draw the slab at the bottom part of the building.
Run the "3D View" command to view the newly created slab in more detail.
362
4M
Note: Instead of defining a slab using a polyline, you can define it using "Points". Select "Slab Outline" by "Points" and type "P" (polygonal) to the prompt that appears, in order to specify the outer outline of the slab next. The following prompt appears: First point: prompting you to specify the starting point of the slab. As soon as you specify it, the prompts involving the second point and so on appear, until you specify all the outline points (pressing the left mouse button each time). Having specified all the points (beware! the circular wall section is assumed to consist of a large number of short straight segments), right click to view the outline of the slab being drawn, while focus is switched to the dialog box again. Then, select "Hole" and "Circular" and specify the centre of the circle in the area where the staircase will be placed. Next, the application prompts you to specify the radius. Specify the radius moving accordingly, using the mouse, and press <Enter> in the prompt "16 segments", in which case the circular hole is drawn on the screen. Following this, specify slab level = -0,25 and slab thickness = 0.25, to draw the slab at the bottom part of the building.
9.1.6 Rails
In order to draw the rails, the following actions should be performed: Select "Special Elements"->"Rail" and specify the type and parameters of the rail you want to draw in the appearing dialog box:
progeCAD Architecture
363
Suppose that you have specified the above parameters for the rail. -> Click "Definition - Poins" and the following prompt appears in the command line: Enter first point: prompting you to specify the first endpoint (one of the endpoints) of the rail in the ground plan. As soon as you specify it (move, using the mouse and press <Enter>), the following prompt appears: Enter next point: prompting you to specify the second endpoint of the rail. Continue in the same manner, specifying the rest of the endpoints. As soon as you are finished, press the right button of the mouse and the following prompt appears: Insert Side Point: We need to define the side on which the width of the rail will be located. Finally the dialog appears again. By clicking OK we can see on our screen how the rail is being shaped.
9.1.7 Staircase
In order to draw the staircase, select "SPECIAL ELEMENTS" in the AutoBLD menu and "Staircase" after that. Following this, a window appears, containing slides that correspond to different types of staircases provided by the application. In this window, select the circular type of staircase, in which case the corresponding dialog box appears. By selecting "Centre", focus is switched to another dialog box, where you initially specify the centre, and then the big radius (at the starting point), the small radius as well as the arc of the staircase.
Returning to the initial dialog box, you can view the following parameters:
364
4M
Select "Compute" and click "OK" to view the staircase on your screen.
We can anytime modify the staircase by using the "Modify Staircase" command, either by double clicking on the stair or through the right button of the mouse and pressing Properties. Here we can add rails or low walls with handrails etc, in accordance with the instructions given in the corresponding section of this Guide, regarding staircases.
progeCAD Architecture
365
Perform any desired changes (e.g. delete the staircase, add rails to the balcony of the first floor) and switch to "Project Drawings" -> "Axonometric", to see the axonometric view of the building drawn (use the HIDE command to hide the lines).
9.1.9 Roof
Select "Special Elements" in the AutoBLD menu and "Roof" after that, in which case a window appears, containing slides that correspond to different types of roofs. Suppose that you specify an isoclinal roof. Next, the dialog box of the roof appears on the screen. Click the "Points" button on the top of the box. Then, the following prompt appears in the command line:
Enter first point: prompting you to specify the first endpoint (one of the endpoints) of the roof in the ground plan. As soon as you specify it (move, using the mouse and press <Enter>), the following prompt appears: Enter Next point: prompting you to specify the second endpoint of the side of the roof. Continue, in the same manner, to specify the other roof endpoints (in the circular section, specify several points as if you dealt with a polygon). Right click to see the outline of the roof being drawn and a dialog box appearing on your screen, where you can specify the values of the inclination (e.g. 15%, in which case you can view the inclination being calculated in degrees, and shown simultaneously) and the roof height. The values of level (e.g. 3 m), thickness (e.g. 0.10 m) and extension (e.g. 0.40 m) can be adjusted by the user.
366
4M
Note: The outline of the Roof can be alternatively specified using a "Polyline", instead of being specified using "Points", which you encountered earlier. progeCAD Architecture 367
368
4M
10. PhotoIDEA
As it has already been mentioned in the "Introduction" of this User's Guide, PhotoIDEA is a tool for quality photorealism, which supports photorealistic images of high quality through a simple procedure. PhotoIDEA uses a series of actual materials with texture (e.g. Marble, Wood, Stone, Carpets etc) which are integrated and can be selected through ProgeCAD Architecture.
PhotoIDEA
369
The fact that the structural elements objects that are used in building construction contain their material from the beginning (thanks to the general structure of the ProgeCAD Architecture package) results in the simplification of the whole procedure of using PhotoIDEA. According to the above-mentioned in this User's Guide, every object (e.g. walls, frames, pillars etc) is univocally linked to a color-material, in its "parameters" screen. In case it is associated with a color that is not linked to a material, PhotoIDEA will simply take into consideration this color. Additionally, PhotoIDEA, thanks to its unique commands "Adjust Materials to Objects", spares the user of time consuming procedures of data definition, which should be performed by the user. The selection and editing of the materials the user wishes to use in his/her project, the positioning of the lighting sources, the background selection, the selection of photographic objects and, naturally, the execution of the "Photorealism" command with all the relative parameters are performed through the options group "PhotoIDEA", which can be found in the ProgeCAD Architecture menu.
All these commands can be selected from the menu or from the "Render" icon bar that looks like the adjacent figure. If this bar is not "open", run the "View"->"Toolbars" command and activate the "Render" option in the window with the check boxes and the bar will appear on the screen (and it can be positioned wherever the user wishes).
Note: In case the PhotoIDEA program is not available (or it is not installed), the option group "PhotoIDEA" and its relevant options appear on the menu but they are inactive. Provided it has been installed, it is active on condition that you have previously specified a project name.
370
4M
PhotoIDEA
371
To control the appearance of the shaded image, choose Settings > Drawing Settings, and then click the 3D Settings tab and select the options you want. You can shade the surfaces and edges of the model in four ways: Faces shaded; edges not highlighted. Faces shaded; edges highlighted in the background color. Faces filled in the background color; edges drawn using the entity color (similar to a hidden-line view). Faces filled using the entity color; edges highlighted in the background color.
On the left side there is a list of the materials that are available at that moment for the needs of the particular project, while on the right side there is a list of the materials that you have generally at your disposal, from the material library (e.g. the Render.mli).
372
4M
In case you need a material from the General List of the PhotoIDEA Library in your project, all you have to do is to select this material (it is highlighted in blue color) and click "Insert". You can then see that this material is transferred on the left side. Before you "Insert" it, you can view this material through the "Preview" option in the window in the middle of the dialog box. Preview can be performed either in the form of spheres or in the form of cubes, selecting accordingly from the list right below the "Preview" button. The rest of the dialog box options are the following: Export: This is the reverse of the "Insert" option, e.g. you can transfer a material from the project in the Material Libraries. Delete: Deletes a material, either from the project file or from the Material Library that is open. Purge: Deletes the materials that have not been linked (to object, color or layer) in the current drawing. Open: Another library list (file) can open and materials can be saved in or selected from this library. Save: Saves the modifications that have been made in the open library or saves this library with a different name. To enable the Material library Do one of the following: Choose PhotoIDEA > Material Library. On the Rendering toolbar, click the tool ( Type matlib and then press Enter. ).
Apart from the "Preview" option, which can be performed here as well, there are also the following possibilities:
PhotoIDEA
373
Attach: This option associates the selected material with an object that is going to be selected later on. Selecting the desired material and then pressing Attach displays the drawing and you are prompted to select the entities where the specified material should be applied. This command applies for user-drawn objects and not for entities inserted from libraries or typical elements (such as walls, openings etc). To modify the materials for drawings inserted from a library, you should run the "Edit 3D Objects" command which is described further down. Moreover, to modify the materials of typical elements (walls, openings etc), you should open the corresponding dialog box selecting "3D Color" and "2D Color". Detach: Similarly, pressing Detach, you are prompted to select the objects from which you want to remove the selected material. This option also does not apply for entities inserted from libraries or typical elements (walls, openings etc). ACI: This option allows assigning colors to materials. Upon selecting the desired material, press By ACI; a dialog box entitled Assign color to material opens.
First, select the desired material (left column); then, select the position where it should be located (right column). It is recommended to use a blank location and then press Attach. As a result, the selected material appears in the right column. Then, press OK to close this dialog box and return to the Materials window. A color is now assigned to the specified material and, selecting any menu with colors, this material appears in the specified location. layer: This option allows assigning layers to materials. First, select the desired material (left column); then, select the layer name which should be assigned to it (right column) and press Attach. As a result, the selected material appears in the right column. Then, press OK to close this dialog box and return to the Materials window. A color is now assigned to the specified material and, selecting any menu with colors, this material appears in the specified location.
374
4M
Modify: This option opens the following dialog box that helps you modify the selected material:
More specifically, you can modify anyone of the material "Attributes" that appear on the left side, by specifying a "Value" with the sliding key on the upper side. You can also modify "Color", by altering the ratios of Red, Green and Blue or selecting between the color systems RGB and HLS. More specifically, the material properties which you can modify are: 1. Color/Pattern: Color is the basic color that reflects from the object. In order to import a drawing through "File selection", select the image (Bitmap) that will be used as a drawing. 2. Ambient: The option for lighting the material with the ambient light determines the quantity of the ambient light that will illuminate the material. In general, keep the ambient value lower that 0.3. The greater the value the more faded the image will appear. 3. Reflection: Here it is determined the amount of the striking on the material light that will be reflected, as well as the reflection color. For shiny objects set the refection value at 0.7 and the color at 0.3. If you wish the color of the highlighted areas to be white, change the value of Red, Green and Blue until it becomes 1. 4. Roughness: The roughness value determines the size of the highlighted areas. Roughness has no meaning at all if reflection has no value. The lower the roughness value is, the smaller the highlighted area that will appear on the object will be. 5. Transparency: The transparency value enables the user to make an object, or just a part of it, transparent. You can set the transparency value from "0" to "1". The greater the value is, the more transparent the object will be displayed. Transparency increases the photorealism period. In many cases it can double or triple this period.
PhotoIDEA
375
6. Refraction: Through this option you can specify a value for the refraction coefficient of a transparent material. The refraction value has a meaning only if transparency has a value. Indicative values for the refraction coefficient are: 1.0 for air, 1.33 for water, 1.5 for glass and 2.4 for diamonds. 7. Bump-Map: This option supports the creation of a file, according to which the height differences will appear on a material, e.g. the grooves among the bricks. In this file, the lighter an area appears, the higher it is above the others. Adjust Bitmap: Through this option it is possible to set the size of the image that is positioned as a material, so that it will appear in its natural dimensions. The existing image has some natural dimensions. If you maintain the default values for offset and scale, then it is possible the image not to be visible on a natural scale. A methodology so that the image is displayed with natural dimensions is the following: Suppose you have a bitmap with the following natural dimensions in meters: a for the horizontal dimension and b for the vertical one. Next, insert the following values: U Offset Scale (a-1)/2 1/a V (b-1)/2 1/b
For example, you have an image with a tile with dimensions 0.15m x 0.15m, and you should insert the following values: U Offset Scale (0.15-1)/2= -0.425 1/0.15=6.666 V (0.15-1)/2= -0.425 1/0.15=6.666
The materials specified in PhotoIDEA have a natural scale, but the user may modify them, if this is desired. Attention! If you want to save a material in a material library (e.g. the Render.mli) in scale, type the actual size and not the reciprocal (e.g. in the above example, concerning the tile, you should type 0.15 and 0.15). Upon completing the modification of the selected material properties, press OK to save the changes and return to the Materials window. Dublicate: Copies a material to a new material, in order to modify it.
376
4M
New: Creates a new material, through the adjacent dialog screen, by typing its name and specifying the color and the other properties, similarly to the "Modify" section. The type of the new material that is created can be one of the following: Basic Granite Marble Wood For example, if a new material of "Wood" type is selected and the proper values for its parameters are specified (Light color, Dark color, Reflection etc) the desired type of wood can be selected. Performing successive tests and previews after each parameter modification, the desired material can be approached satisfactorily.
To edit the Material library Do one of the following: Choose PhotoIDEA > Edit Materials. Type rmat and then press Enter.
PhotoIDEA
377
10.7 Sun
If you want to have natural light photorealism, the sun position can be easily defined via this command. In the appearing dialog window select the city you want (e.g. Ismirn) and the month for which the sun position is taken into account (e.g. September) as well as the day and time (normal or daylight saving) you wish photorealism to take place. Based on the above data and in conjunction with the setting of the north direction, which can be defined by placing the relevant symbol via the "Set North" command within the Topographic (AutoREG), the program automatically places the sun, so that the photorealism scene that will be created complies with the natural lighting completely. To Define the Sun Do one of the following: Choose PhotoIDEA > Sun. Type sun and then press Enter.
Ambient light: Through this option you can adjust the intensity of the ambient light. Ambient light is the lighting that exists in a specific space, without coming directly from a certain light source, e.g. the natural lighting that exists in a room on a cloudy day. The intensity is constant for all surfaces in all directions.
378
4M
The greater the value is, the more intensely the areas that are not directly illuminated by a source will be lighted. You may select a different colour for ambient light, except the white, through the "colour" option. Point light: It is the fixed light source that emits to all directions. You may define or modify the intensity, the colour and whether there will be any fading or shadows. Spot Light: Spotlight creates a light cone. You can define the direction, the size of the central cone of the middle beam (define the angle of the cone vertex), the size of the penumbra cone (define the angle of the penumbra cone vertex), the colour, the fading and whether shadows are created from objects. Distant light: Distant light creates parallel light beams in only one direction. The sun is an example of such a light source. In Photoidea, of course, it will not be necessary to select the "Distant light" option to define the sun since you can easily do so by running the "Sun" command instead. To edit the lights Do one of the following: Choose PhotoIDEA > Edit Lights. Type light and then press Enter.
10.10 Background
This option is used to select the Background, that is the image behind your scene. For example, the background may be a plain colour, a scenery, a cloudy sky and any kind of picture in general. If the "Background" option is selected, the following dialog window appears, on the top of which there are 2 options: "Solid" and "Image". Each of these options excludes the possibility to activate the other one.
PhotoIDEA
379
Solid Background: Solid Background may simply correspond to the existing CAD background (since the relevant box is checked) or any other colour (since this box is not checked). In the last case the user may select the colour he wishes to use for the background from the colour palette shown below.
Moreover, after the user has selected the colour, he can modify it slightly by setting accordingly the 3 sliding bars that exist for this purpose, and activate the "Preview" window at every change in order to view the background colour in the frame. Image: Select, through the "File" option, the image-file of the "Landscape" where your drawing will be inserted.
For example, if you select the "Biglake.tga" file from the "Textures" subfolder, the corresponding background will appear. Note: Provided you have shooted (from the appropriate aspect) the area where the building site is located and you have digitized the picture (e.g. by using a scanner or directly a digital camera), you can easily use it as it was mentioned earlier. Naturally, when you create a "perspective" in the "Project Drawings", you should provide angle and height relevant to those of the shooting.
380
4M
To edit the background Do one of the following: Choose PhotoIDEA > Background. Type background and then press Enter.
10.11 Fog
This option is used to activate the fog directly through the PhotoIDEA menu dialog window.
To set the Fog Do one of the following: Choose PhotoIDEA > Fog. Type fog and then press Enter.
PhotoIDEA
381
Through the "Height" option you can define in meters the height of the object in the drawing (e.g. 1.8 m for a human figure). Through the "Position" option you can position the object to the drawing. Attention! If you are working in axonometric mode but the drawing is not displayed, it is possible that the Ortho is active which might be the reason for not appearing in the scenery. Note: If you want to edit a landscape object then you may run the "Edit Landscape Objects" (LSEDIT) command. In order to save a new object in the library, run the "Landscape Object Library" (LSLIB) command. The landscape objects are saved in files with the extension "lli" (e.g. Render_eg.lli). To insert landscape objects Do one of the following: Choose PhotoIDEA > Landscape Objects. Type lsnew and then press Enter.
Choose PhotoIDEA > Bitmap Objects Library. Type lslib and then press Enter.
OpenGL: This option allows very quick rendering as well as moving within the ProgeCAD Architecture environment. In particular, you can run the Pan, Zoom in, Zoom out and 3D Orbit commands, while in rendering mode, to get a rendered image of the drawing from every side. This way, the user is able to have an overall view of the rendering effects, for all the objects and materials he/she has selected, without having to repeat the "Render" option segment by segment. Render: The "Render" option shows the materials on the surfaces (e.g. Brick) but does not create shadows. Circumambient Lighting: If this option is activated, you can see shadows on the surfaces from circumambient lighting (e.g. Sun). Shadows: Provided this option is active, rendering will create shadows from the various surfaces. Lights: If this option is activated, you can see shadows from lighting sources (point light, distant light, spotlight). PhotoIDEA 383
Materials: If this option is active, with rendering you can see the materials that have been specified before. Optical: If this option is active, with rendering surfaces will be properly updated according to all the above (shades, materials, lights). The other options in this window are described below: Destination: Define where rendering will be performed. By selecting the button under the "Destination" indication, an option list appears, where you can define the rendering mean. Window: Rendering will be performed on your screen as shown. File: This option is used when you want to save the image in a file, in order either to save it to a diskette or to further edit it through another application.
File Type: By clicking the pull down menu box of this section option list, an option menu appears, from where you may select the file type on which photorealism will be applied. ProgeCAD Architecture supports the following file types: BMP, TGA (compressed and uncompressed), and PNG. Clicking the lower pull down menu box of this section option list, an option menu appears from which you may select the image dimensions in pixels. These dimensions are proportional to the desired screen resolution. If you select a standard image size (e.g. 800x600 or 640x480), the readings ":", "Y:" and the "Aspect Ratio" are automatically adjusted and cannot be selected. But if a user-defined size is selected instead, you may then modify them. Through ":", "Y:" adjust the image size that will be created within the file. Aspect Ratio: Here you can adjust the ratio of the screen pixel size to the file pixel size (for user-defined resolution). Colors: In this section, you may set the colours of the image created through rendering. After you have completed the settings, click to return to the previous dialog box. To control the render settings Do one of the following: Select PhotoIDEA > Render Settings. Type rpref and press <Enter>.
10.16 Render
Through this command you can have the desired scene rendered. The command is executed by typing "render" (and pressing "enter") in the line command, by clicking the corresponding icon or from the menu. Creating a rendered image of your drawing removes hidden lines and then shades the surface as though it were illuminated from multiple light sources. Full rendering creates a photo-realistic image of your model, complete with light sources, shadows, surface material properties, and reflections. You can illuminate your image with spotlights, distant lighting to simulate sunshine, and ambient light. If you choose not to customize the light sources, the program generates default light sources for you.
384
4M
Rays from these imaginary light sources are traced as they reflect off and refract through the surfaces of the model, a process called ray tracing. Ray tracing determines where shadows fall and how reflections on shiny materials such as metal and glass appear. You can modify the reflective properties of the materials that make up your model to control how the light rays reflect off its surfaces. Full rendering creates automatically a base on which your model is displayed, if you dont already have one, so it does not appear suspended in space. A background is also automatically added to the image. A background such as a cloudy sky or an imported raster graphic such as a stone wall can also be added behind the image, making it even more realistic. When the Photorealism procedure is completed, the corresponding image appears on your screen. You may repeat the whole procedure as many times as you wish, after modifying any of the above parameters, until the desired outcome is achieved. Note: In order to print a photo, you should either define the destination (destination render window) or copy it to a file and then run a Windows "Painting" program (such as Paintbrush or Paint) to load (through "Open") the file (e.g. BMP or TGA type) and print it (through "Print"). Apparently, a colour photo requires a colour printer and of course the relevant printer driver to be correctly set. To create a fully rendered image Do one of the following: Choose PhotoIDEA > Render On the Rendering toolbar, click the Render tool ( Type render and then press Enter. ).
PhotoIDEA
385
386
4M
11. WalkIDEA
WalkIDEA is the virtual walkthrough component of IDEA, which enables the user to "walk" inside and outside the building. In the following sections, all the WalkIDEA commands are successively described in every detail, so that the user understands how to accomplish the desired "walkthrough" and take the maximum benefit of the program utilities. For the well understanding of the WalkIDEA function and the proper use of materials, lights, backgrounds, surrounding space objects etc, a good knowledge of PhotoIDEA, is required.
Every new project is created in the architectural project Directory, with the extension OSG. The user may define different projects for the same building and create walkthrough files, each time with different materials, lighting etc.
WalkIDEA
387
388
4M
11.9 Walkthrough
Through this option you can finally simulate on your screen a live walkthrough within the building. The program "walkthrough" menu includes the following options (from the option menu) and option buttons.
11.9.1 File
The options of this group cover the file management according to the Windows standardisation. More specifically: The "Open File" option is used when you want to load an existing file for further editing. When you enter the program via the architectural IDEA, the walkthrough project entitled "Project Name.osg" is automatically selected. The Save option is used when you want to save the open file. The Save as option is used when you want to save the open file, with a different name. In the Save As tab that opens, you can define the desired name and the path where the file shall be saved. Run the "Exit" command to exit the walkthrough program.
11.9.2 Show
The Show option comprises the toolbars of the icons that are related to the various menu options. These are divided in sections, as for example the toolbars for the Tool Bar, the Movement, the Paths, the Viewing points etc. By activating one of the toolbars (clicking on the relevant menu option so that the check mark is shown), we get the corresponding toolbar in the menu. This toolbar can be moved towards any direction the user wishes, e.g. at the top, left, right or bottom of the screen.
WalkIDEA
389
This can be easily done by dragging the toolbar with the use of the left mouse button and moving it to the desired location (with the mouse button pressed), exactly the same way it is done in any windows application. In the following example (screen) several "open" toolbars in all possible places are shown
11.9.3 Properties
11.9.3.1 Background
With this option the following dialogue box is displayed:
The above screen enables you to select the Background type between the options Compact and Images. In case you select Compact as the background type, the corresponding field is activated which enables you to select the desired colour by changing the values for the three basic colours, Red, Green and Blue.
390
4M
In case you select Images as the background type, the corresponding field is activated, where you have the following options: Simple Background, where you can define a unique bmp file as the background and CubeMap, where you can define 6 different bmp files. These 6 files correspond to the 6 edges of a hypothetical cube, at the centre of which is considered to be the item in which you walkthrough. Finally, the option Level enables you to select whether you want to use any XY level, and in that case you can define either a bmp image, or a compact colour, which shall be used by the program as the base, after you provide the value for the altitude z in which you should desire to place it. With the option Define as default, you are enabled to define as the default settings the settings that you desire (e.g. bmp image, XY plane, sun position etc) and use them in any file you wish with the option Default.
11.9.3.2 Lights
With this option the following dialogue box is displayed:
This dialogue box enables you to define at first the Type of scene lights. The available options are: None, in case that you do not wish to have any lights, Generic Light, in case that you wish to have the default lighting of the program and Main Light, in case that you wish to have a light that shall follow the route of the walkthrough. With the option Lights from drawing, you can select whether you want the lights that are defined in the PhotoIDEA application to participate or not. Finally, with the option Light colour, you can define the colour of the Main Light.
WalkIDEA
391
With the option Configure you can perform some additional settings, depending on the selected encoder. File name
This option requires the path for saving and the name of the video file with ending avi.
11.9.3.4 Images
File name The program enables you to create some image files, by printing the scene that appears at this moment on the screen. With the File name option, you are required to provide the path for saving and the image file name, and consequently the image file opens on the screen whenever the relevant icon is pressed.
11.9.3.5 Paths
This option enables you to increase or decrease the speed, for the defined paths, as well as to change the repetition mode. The options for the repetition mode are three: either to execute the path once and then stop, or to execute the path once and then execute the reverse path, or, finally, to repeat the path illimitably.
11.9.3.6 Stereoanaglyph
This command activates the stereoscopic view of the 3D model, based on blue-red colors technique (stereoanaglyph). Using the appropriate blue-red glasses, the user can observe its model in its real 3 dimensions. In order to get the maximum performance the user has the option to set properly the value of the distance between the two eyes.
392
4M
11.9.4 Help
The option ''About'' provides information for the program version.
WalkIDEA
393
2. Press the middle mouse button to rotate your building around the axis which is vertical to the building plane and passes through the metacenter of the polygon that envelops the building. 3. Press the right mouse button to move the visible part of the screen, so that a new (previously not visible) part is revealed. The visible part of the screen moves towards the desired area by moving the mouse correspondingly. If you keep this icon activated, the building is not free to move or rotate continuously, by pressing the mouse buttons (as described above). With this option the program returns to the starting point of the walkthrough (as with pressing the <space bar>).
394
4M
WalkIDEA
395
396
4M